Home

in Installation (IM 32Q01C50-31E)

1. Figure B3 3 3 6 Vnet Properties Default Setting TIP Internet Connection Sharing ICS is for sharing the internet connection by the computers in a small scale office network or home network Bridge Connection Do not use bridge connection If bridge connection is created in the computer not only the control bus communication of the computer becomes abnormal but also the communication of the whole control bus network may be jeopardized If the bridge connection is already cre ated you need to delete the bridge connection r jm Search Network Connections 2 File Edit View Tools Advanced Help Organize Disable this network device Diagnose this connection gt i Ethernet Sig Vnet Enabled Bridged _ Enabled Bridged Broadcom NetXtreme 57x Gigabi eZ Yokogawa Vnet Adapter Network Bridge Network cable unplugged MAC Bridge Miniport Figure B3 3 3 7 Example of Prohibited Network Setting Bridge Connection is Enabled IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 42 Homegroup Windows 7 Only In a ProSafe RS system folders and printers are shared using the file sharing function for the workgroup network environment as with the earlier OS versions Accordingly do not select Home Network in the network location setting E Procedure 1 Rename Local Area Connections A network after the installation is named Local
2. Figure B3 7 1 1 New User Dialog Box 6 Right click the user you have created and select Properties and then click Add on the Member of tab IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 7 Creating User Accounts gt B3 70 apean popes Changes to a user s group membership Remove are not effective until the net time the _ user logs on Figure B3 7 1 2 User Properties 7 Select an appropriate user group for the created user and click OK r Select Groups Select this object type Groups From this location SENG1150 Enter the object names to select examples SENG1150 PSF_OPERATOR Figure B3 7 1 3 Select Groups TIP A user who belongs to the administrative group PSF_MAINTENANCE must also be a member of the Ad ministrators group 8 Inthe user properties dialog box confirm that the group you selected has been added to the Member of list IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 7 Creating User Accounts gt B3 71 B3 7 2 When the Legacy Model of Security Settings are Applied The procedure for creating user accounts is the same as that for creating user accounts on a Standalone management computer However with the Legacy model Windows groups PSF_xxxx are not supported So there is no need to add the created users to these groups SEE ALso For more information about creating user accounts re
3. Figure C8 4 1 1 Specify backup file of security 3 Select either of the Apply Change to options and set as follows e Ifyou just want to change the encryption key of one file select Single File and then specify the source file and the name of the folder to which the file after conversion is to be saved e Ifyou want to change the encryption key of multiple files in a folder select Multiple Files and then specify the source file folder and the folder to which the files after conversion are to be saved TIP The encryption key for a pair of saved files with hed and csf extensions should be changed to the same encryption key When Single File is selected you can change only one file at a time So you need to do the operation twice to change for both hed file and csf files When Multiple Files is selected all the files in the specified source folder are changed together The files generated in the destination folder will have the same file names as those in the source folder Ensure that all the files in a folder have the same encryption key IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File Password gt C8 1 9 4 Click Next The Change Password Encryption Key page appears Change Password Encryption Key Type old password Encryption Key Type new password Encryption Key Retype new password Encryption Key Fig
4. Restore plan defaults ox _cence_ sooty Figure B3 2 1 5 Power Options Advanced Settings 9 Click OK TIP Configure UPS service settings after installing the ProSafe RS software SEE ALso For more information about setting up UPS services refer to B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service on page B3 83 E Windows Defender The Windows Defender software detects and removes spy ware It is recommended to turn off this function because it is not used in ProSafe RS In a domain environment turn off Windows Defender on domain member PCs at a time by means of a domain management operation such as Group Policies In a workgroup environment turn off Windows Defender by using either of the following pro cedures e Turning Off Windows Defender in Control Panel e Turning Off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor TIP If Tools of Windows Defender is grayed out turn off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor Turning Off Windows Defender in Control Panel 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel Select Large icons or Small icons for the display style and then select Windows De fender The Windows Defender window appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 12 Click Tools displayed at the top The Tools and Settings window appears
5. 7 Check the installation settings in the dialog box for confirming installation setup and click Install The installation of ProSafe RS starts and the dialog box showing installation pro gress status appears 8 When you have completed the installation of the ProSafe RS software the installation complete dialog box appears If there are no products to be installed subsequently select Yes want to set up IT se curity now and click Finish If you intend to continue to install other YOKOGAWA products select No want to install other software products and click Finish IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 1 Installation for Upgrading gt C4 4 A IMPORTANT If you select No want to install other software products here you must perform IT security settings when you install the last product Additional Execution of IT Security Configuration If you are upgrading from R2 where the standard model of security settings are applied you must configure IT security settings again in this way after configuring the IT security settings following the installation of the product reboot the computer and then start the IT Security Tool from the Start menu to configure the IT security settings E Tasks Related to Licenses After making IT security settings perform the tasks related to licenses EE ALso For more information about tasks related to licenses refer to B3 6 Distributing an
6. Integration type The connection setup of various products The possible values are e 01 When products are installed and operated on the same computer and they cannot communicate or share files with each other e 02 When products are installed and operated on separate computers and they can communicate or share files with each other e 03 When products are installed and operated either on the same computer or on separate computers and they can function together by communicating or sharing files with each other Revision number The version or revision number of the products that you want to connect When the required connection procedures change on release of new versions or revisions this revision number is incremented The revision number can be from 01 to 99 TIP You cannot install two products that have integration type 02 on the same computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 A IMPORTANT D1 2 lt D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA products gt In the user s manuals of a product the settings that are required to connect with other prod ucts are explained However information about the settings for connection that is provided in the user s manuals may be inconsistent between the connected products The reason is that different products are released at different timings To get the latest information refer to the user s manuals of both products to check the product version number and the revision nu
7. Are License Projects Displayed in License Manager Yes No Restore License Project gt Redistribute Licenses to License assigned Stations 2 Configure Function Specific Settings 2 Finish Reinstallation 1 If the license project backup is already created this task is not required 2 These tasks are not required for the computer dedicated to license management Figure C7 1 2 Flow of Reinstallation for the License Management Station Back Up the License Projects Back up the license projects managed on the computer SEE ALso For more information about the procedure for backing up the license project refer to 3 6 Backing up and restoring a license project in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E Uninstall the ProSafe RS Software Uninstall the ProSafe RS software For a computer dedicated to license management unin stall the license management software SEE ALso For more information about the procedure for uninstallation on an SENG PC refer to C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG on page C6 2 For more information about the procedure for uninstallation on the computer dedicated to license manage ment refer to C6 2 Uninstallation on the computer Dedicated to License Management on page C6 7 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO lt C7 1 When the Com
8. Figure B3 3 3 4 Disabling the Vnet IP Open Communication Device When Only Vnet IP is Installed Disable Ethernet Vnet IP Vnet IP Figure B3 3 3 5 Only Vnet IP is Installed B3 40 On a computer in a system where only Vnet IP is installed follow these steps to disable the Ethernet device 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Security gt Device Manager TIP gt System gt Device Manager 3 On Device Manager unfold Network adapters In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 environment select Control Panel gt System and Maintenance 4 Select the Ethernet device and then click the Disable button on the toolbar E Prohibitions Do not use the following features in ProSafe RS e Internet Connection Sharing ICS e Bridge Connection IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 41 e Homegroup Internet Connection Sharing ICS Do not select the Allow other network users to connect through this computer s Internet con nection check box on the Sharing tab in the properties dialog box for V net VnetIPOpen or Ethernet these connection names are set in the procedures described later vnet Properties E V Allow other network users to control or disable the shared Intemet connection Using ICS Intemet Connection Sharing Settings i
9. 1 2 Log on as an administrative user B3 16 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Power Options The Power Options window appears Select High performance under Preferred plans and click Change plan settings below it The Edit Plan Settings window appears Click Change advanced power settings The Power Options dialog box appears showing the advanced settings Under Hard disk set the setting for Turn off hard disk after to Never Advanced settings gt Select the power plan that you want to customize and B then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable High performance Active v amp Hard disk B Turn off hard disk after Setting Never Wireless Adapter Settings Sleep USB settings Power buttons and lid PCI Express m Processar nower management Restore plan defaults __ Awy Figure B3 2 2 2 Advanced Settings in Power Options Dialog Box Hard Disk Setting 6 Configure the Sleep settings as follows e Sleep after Never e Allow hybrid sleep Off e Hibernate after Never IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 17 gt Power Options then choose settings that reflect how you want your Y Select the po
10. 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TIP lt D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum gt D1 1 9 Select Logon Typ Default user of R2 03 and earlier versions za Figure D1 3 1 1 Select Logon Dialog Box 4 Select Automatically logon the designated user for connecting OPC server and then Default user of R2 03 and earlier versions and click OK When the Legacy model is applied to both products 1 Set the logon type on the SENG 2 Add an Exaquantum program user on the SENG The name and the password of the Exaquantum program user should be as follows User name Quantumuser default user name changeable with a supplied tool Password quantumuser default password changeable with a supplied tool 3 Onthe SENG create the same user account as the logon user account for running Exa quantum 4 On the SENG and the computer installed with Exaquantum perform the setting for using Exaquantum as an OPC client When the Standard model is applied to both products 1 Set the logon type on the SENG 2 Configure the DCOM settings on the SENG Refer to the user s manual Open Interfaces for the procedure 3 On the SENG create QTM_PROCESS which is the Exaquantum program user account a Insert the Exaquantum software medium and start the command prompt window then move to the following folder Drive Tools b Run the following command CreateQTMProcess exe The QTM_PROCESS user account is created
11. A2 2 3 Setup Procedure for a File Server You can provide a file server in the system if centralized management is required for project databases The following figure shows the setup procedure for a file server TIP This flowchart illustrates the procedure for setting up a computer that serves only as a file server Start Prepare to configure IT security settings on the file server Create and set up shared folders Save the IT security settings on the file server Configure the IT security settings on the file server Create accounts on the file server for users who access project data Create the project folder on the file server End Figure A2 2 3 1 Setup Procedure for a File Server SEE ALso For more information about setting up a computer that serves only as a file server refer to B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server on page B5 2 For more information about the procedure to set up a computer as both a file server and a license manage ment station refer to B5 3 Setting Up the Computer that Serves as Both File Server and License Management Station on page B5 9 For more information about setting up the file server function on SENG refer to B5 2 Setting Up the File Server Function on SENG on page B5 8 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 1 0 A2 2 4
12. Precautions when Setting DLYT for SCS Link Transmission Safety Communication How to calculate DLYT of SCS link transmission safety communication for revisions R2 03 51 or earlier is explained below Reception interval timeout value reception timeout hereinafter referred to as OUTT and in ter SCS transmission delay timeout value transmission timeout hereinafter refer red to as DLYT are used to set the timeout monitoring time of SCS link transmission safety communi cation Temporary transmission delay errors can be detected by monitoring the communication with OUTT In addition you can set DLYT to detect constant transmission delay errors DLYT detects not only transmission delay but also time gap among SCSs For this reason determine the set value of DLYT taking generation of erroneous trips due to time gap into con sideration as well e Reception interval timeout value OUTT It is valid only when the station on the transmission side is an SCS The reception interval refers to the time interval of receiving data by an SCS Specify the reception interval timeout value OUTT for each communication target If normal data cannot be received within the reception interval timeout value OUTT a communication error occurs and a failsafe value is output e Inter SCS transmission delay timeout value DLYT It is valid only when the station on the transmission side is an SCS IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A
13. e V net Driver Install the V net driver included in the CD ROM of ProSafe RS software However for the HIS with the CS 3000 software R3 07 environment installation of the driver is not nee ded E Software Revisions Software revision information in release R1 01 30 and in the earlier releases is as follows Software Release R1 01 00 e SENG software release number R1 01 00 e SCS system program release number R1 01 00 Software Release R1 01 10 e SENG software release number R1 01 10 e SCS system program release number R1 01 00 Software Release R1 01 30 e SENG software release number R1 01 30 e SCS system program release number R1 01 30 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release numbers of the SCS system programs on SCSs communicating with each other using the Inter SCS safety communication function must be the same E Procedures for Upgrading When using the added and upgraded features of R1 01 30 install the ProSafe RS R1 01 30 or later version of software to SENG and open existing SCS projects Then the following new features of R1 01 30 are applicable SCS information Dialog box e Saves and downloads the operation marks e Locks user defined FB parameters SEE ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 1 Upgrading to R1 01 30 gt
14. Overview of product security settings in Open Interfaces IM 32Q05B10 31E When the Standard model is applied to ProSafe RS and the Legacy model to Exaquantum 1 Set the logon type on the SENG 2 Configure the DCOM settings on the SENG Refer to the user s manual Open Interfaces for the procedure 3 Add an Exaquantum program user on the SENG TIP The name and the password of the Exaquantum program user should be as follows User name Quantumuser default user name changeable with a supplied tool Password quantumuser default password changeable with a supplied tool 4 Add the Quantumuser user you have created to the following user group on the SENG e In the case of standalone management or when combination management is applied on some computers PSF_OPC e In the case of domain management or when combination management is applied on all computers PSF_OPC_LCL 5 Onthe SENG create the same user account as the logon user account for running Exa quantum and add the created user account to the PSF_OPC group 6 On the computer installed with Exaquantum create the PSF_PROCESS user account a Insert the ProSafe RS software medium and start the command prompt window then move to the following folder Drive ProSafe RS SECURITY b Run the following command ProSafe Security CreateProSafeProcess ex The PSF_PROCESS user account is created IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D
15. a KSecPkg a LDDM Graphics Subsystem Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper I O Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder 8 Mount Point Manager is msised 9 NDIS System Driver 3 Performance Counters for Windows Driver 9 QoS Packet Scheduler is RDP Encoder Mirror Driver 2 RDPCDD Reflector Display Driver used to gain access to graphics data is Remote Access IPv6 ARP Driver Security Driver Security Processor Loader Driver a System Attribute Cache TCP IP Protocol Driver TCP IP Registry Compatibility Figure C9 2 2 2 Protocol Driver Added Properly Vnet IP Open Communication Driver C9 7 When the driver is added Vnet IP Open Communication Driver BUS2 appears in Network Adapters in Device Manager If the driver does not start successfully the symbol appears next to the network adapter icon Follow these steps to display Device Manger 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Security gt Device Manager IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 8 TIP If you are using Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 select Control Panel gt System and Maintenance gt System gt Device Manager File Action Yiew Help gt qm IDE ATA ATAPI controllers b F Mice and other pointing devices Bro
16. aJi 9 STATION sw2 Operating mode k swa n Ol Li j i Figure B3 1 4 Locations of DIP Switches Setting the Domain Number A domain is a collection of stations that are connected on one control bus network Set a do main number from 1 to 31 1 to 16 when integrating with CENTUM DOMAIN NO MSB LSB 0 TE ED o EO N o Domain number 5 bits Fixed to 0 2 bits Parity of the domain number 1 bit odd parity MSB Most Significant Bit LSB Least Significant Bit Figure B3 1 5 Domain Number Setting DIP Switches IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware gt B3 5 EE p RU For more information about domain numbers and corresponding DIP switch positions refer to Em Domain Numbers and DIP Switch Positions on page App 1 1 Setting the Station Number Station numbers should be set in the range of 1 to 64 it is recommended to set starting from 64 in the descending order STATION NO MSB LSB HHA A CC J L Station number 7 bits Parity of the station number 1 bits odd parity oO I1 0 MSB Most Significant Bit LSB Least Significant Bit Figure B3 1 6 Station Number Setting DIP Switches EE l p ALso For more information about station numbers and corresponding DIP switch positions refer to m Station Numbers and DIP Switch Positions
17. and double click Turn off Windows Defender in the right pane The Turn off Windows Defender Properties dialog box appears 4 Select Enabled and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 20 r Turn off Windows Defender Properties 7 k g Setting Explain ioe Tum off Windows Defender Supported on At least Windows Vista Previous Setting Next Setting Cok cence eoiy Figure B3 2 2 7 Turn off Windows Defender Properties Dialog Box E Disk Defragmenter Disk Defragmenter Tool can be used to reorganize the fragmented files on computer hard disk so as to improve the computer performance With the default setting of Windows Vista the Disk Defragmenter Tool is scheduled to start periodically at 1 00 on Wednesday Because the performance of ProSafe RS may be affected significantly it is recommended to disable the periodic disk defragmentation Moreover you may manually start the disk defragmenter when you feel the disk performance is getting worse or when you perform system maintenance 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Disk De fragmenter The Disk Defragmenter dialog box appears 3 Clear the Run on a schedule recommend check box and click OK Sj Disk Defragmenter bad EE gt Disk Defragmenter consolid
18. eels PyoSate 2S Manual Installation IM 32Q01C50 31E vigilantplant YOKOGAWA IM 32Q01C50 31E i f 4th Edition Yokogawa Electric Corporation Introduction This manual describes the procedure for setting up ProSafe RS When you integrate ProSafe RS with FAST TOOLS replace Vnet IP in the descriptions in this manual with Vnet IP Upstream This manual consists of the following parts e Part A Overview This part provides an overview of ProSafe RS setup e Part B New Setup This part describes the procedure for a new setup of ProSafe RS e Part C Maintenance This part describes the tasks to be done while a ProSafe RS system is used e Part D Connection with Other Products This part describes how to connect ProSafe RS to other YOKOGAWA products and pro vides cautionary notes e Appendix This section describes hardware settings compatibility of ProSafe RS software revisions and cautionary notes Media No IM 32Q01C50 31E CD Ath Edition Jan 2015 YK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2011 Yokogawa Electric Corporation Safety Precautions for Use E Safety Protection and Modification of the Product To protect the system controlled by the Product and the Product itself and to ensure safe operation please observe the safety precautions described in this Manual Yokogawa Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA assumes no liability for safety if users fail t
19. gt Programs gt Programs and Features 3 From the program list select YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS and click Change The Welcome dialog box appears 4 Click Next A dialog box for confirming the uninstallation appears 5 Click Delete Uninstallation starts and a dialog box showing the progress of uninstallation appears 6 In the uninstallation complete dialog box that appears upon completion of the uninstalla tion do either of the following operations e To restart the computer now select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish e To restart the computer later select No will restart my computer later and click Finish IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 Reinstalling the ProSafe RS Software gt C7 1 C7 Reinstalling the ProSafe RS Software This section describes how to reinstall the ProSafe RS Software The procedures are ex plained for the cases when changing and not changing the computer to be used For each case the reinstallation procedure is explained for license assigned stations and for the li cense management station IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 1 When the Computer Used is the Same gt C7 2 C7 1 When the Computer Used is the Same This section describes the procedure for reinstalling the ProSafe RS software to restore the software when the installed file gets damaged or deleted accidentally The assumption is that the compu
20. on page App 1 2 Action Mode Switch SW4 on the printed circuit board is the action mode switch Use the card with all the bits of this DIP switch set to OFF factory set defaults The meaning of DIP switch bits are as follows N M Bit number PE Ou ABCD Figure B3 1 7 Action Mode Switch Table B3 1 1 DIP Switch Usage DIP switch ON DIP switch OFF Remarks A bit1 Always OFF Reserved B bit 2 100 Mbps 1 Gbps Communication speed Default OFF C bit 3 Force Auto Negotiation Default OFF D bit 4 Always OFF Reserved Precautions on Installing the Vnet IP Interface Card e Install VI702 in the computer after setting up Windows but before configuring the network settings e Install network drivers when you restart the computer after installing VI702 Follow the procedure in this manual to install the drivers e If you use VI702 that was used in another system for a system consists of only ProSafe RS erase the settings in the VI702 before installing it in the computer When using such VI702 in a system integrated with CENTUM you do not need to erase the settings in the VI702 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware gt B3 6 res For more information about how to erase the internal settings of a VI702 card refer to Appendix 2 Procedure for Erasing VI702 Internal Settings on page App 2 1 Fo
21. 1 From the Start menu select All programs gt Administrative Tools gt Active Directory Users and Computers The Activate Directory Users and Computers window appears 2 Inthe left pane right click the Users folder and then select New gt User Fie Acton View Help ees zm ORDo umia ara Figure B2 4 1 Activate Directory Users and Computers 3 The New Object User dialog box is displayed Input the necessary information TIP Full name and User logon name have to be input in this dialog box Additionally if the User logon name is input another logon name which is located under the above mentioned User logon name is automatically in put However the name is changeable IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 4 Creating Domain Users gt B2 10 Figure B2 4 2 New Object User 4 Click Next A dialog box appears prompting you to enter the password 5 Enter the password select the check boxes of the required items and click Next A confirmation dialog box appears Click Finish Open the Users folder and check the right pane to confirm that the new domain user has been added Active Directory Users and Computers Figure B2 4 3 Activate Directory Users and Computers confirmation of newly created user E Adding Domain Users to Domain Groups When applying the Standard model of security settings you must add the domain users to ap propriate domain groups
22. 2 Create a new folder for use as the check in folder of Version Control Tool Log on as an administrative user belonging to the PSF_MAINTENANCE group and as sign the share name RS Share to the check in folder If the folder should be shared with other computers grant full control access permissions to Everyone Launch the IT Security Tool from the Start menu and configure security settings without changing the security model and user management type IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 3 Settings for Message Cache Tool gt B4 4 B4 3 Settings for Message Cache Tool If you want to check the status of data collection by other stations using the Message Cache Tool the following setups are required On Workgroup Member Computers 1 Create a user account on the station whose status of data collection shall be checked The user account name and password should be the same as the user account of the computer that uses the Message Cache Tool 2 Make the created user account created in step 1 belong to the PSF_ENGINEER user group E On Windows Domain Member Computers Register users of the Message Cache Tool to the PSF_ENGINEER user group IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 4 Settings Required for OPC Communication gt B4 5 B4 4 Settings Required for OPC Communication This section explains how to make settings required to perform OPC communication when the standard IT security setting m
23. 4 Add the QTM_PROCESS user you have created to the following user group on the SENG e In the case of standalone management or when combination management is applied on some computers PSF_OPC e In the case of domain management or when combination management is applied on all computers PSF_OPC_LCL IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum gt D1 20 5 Onthe SENG create the same user account as the logon user account for running Exa quantum and add the created user account to the PSF_OPC group 6 On the computer installed with Exaquantum create the PSF_PROCESS user account a Insert the ProSafe RS software medium and start the command prompt window then move to the following folder Drive ProSafe RS SECURITY b Run the following command ProSafe Security CreateProSafeProcess ex The PSF_PROCESS user account is created 7 Add the PSF_PROCESS user you have created to the following user group on the com puter installed with Exaquantum e In the case of standalone management or when combination management is applied on some computers QTM_OPC e In the case of domain management or when combination management is applied on all computers QTM_OPC_LCL 8 On the SENG and the computer installed with Exaquantum perform the setting for using Exaquantum as an OPC client SEE ALso For more information about configuring the DCOM settings refer to m DCOM settings in A2 2
24. App 4 3 E Cautions on Using Added and Upgraded Features SEE ALSO A In order to use the added and upgraded features of R1 01 30 it may be required to perform offline downloading to the SCS The related procedures are as follows For more information about detailed procedures after the upgrade refer to Procedure B Master Database Offline Download on page C4 6 e Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 Subsystem Communication Modbus Communication Package When performing the engineering works to apply the Modbus communication package for ALR111 ALR121 on SCS Procedure C should be performed on R1 01 30 or later version SENG On the SCS State Management Window of SCS maintenance Support Tool and on the SCS Status view of the CENTUM HIS that has been integrated with ProSafe RS the sta tus of Comm I O Lock will be displayed with No until the offline download is completed Using the FU FB Added in R1 01 30 In order to use the added FU FB of R1 01 30 such as SYS_SEC_CTL for changing SCS se curity level Procedure C should be performed on R1 01 30 or later version SENG Forcing SCS Security Level 0 From R1 01 30 when SCS security level is 0 the values of internal variables and FB parame ters can be changed without locking the variable or parameter However this change is not valid if Procedure B is not performed on R1 01 30 or later version SEN
25. Click Options The Options window appears From the menu on the left select Administrator and clear the check box for Use this program CS Options Automatic scanning Defauk actions Le this program Real time pectection When the setting is on this program will alert all uvers if spyware or other potentialy Eectuded ties and folders unwanted software attempts to run or install itself on tha computer Exchuded fie types Display items from all users of this computer Advanced s When the setting s on thes program wil allow you to see the History Allowed items and Aderiratreto Quarantined items from aff users beers are hidden by defwalt to protect user privacy Figure B3 2 1 6 Options 7 8 Click Save A dialog box appears informing that Windows Defender is turned off Click the x button Turning Off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor If Tools of Windows Defender is grayed out you can turn off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor Follow these steps to turn off Windows Defender 1 2 Log on as an administrative user Click the Start button of Windows and enter gpedit msc in the Program and file search box The Local Group Policy Editor window appears Select Computer Configuration gt Administrative Templates gt Windows Components gt Windows Defender and double click Turn off Windows Defender in the right pane The Turn off Windows Defender dialog box app
26. Enter the Encryption Key and then click Next Saving of the security settings starts A IMPORTANT e If this password encryption key is lost the saved security settings cannot be restored The password encryption key must be carefully kept by the customer e The password encryption key must be at least one character e The password can consist of upper case and lower case alphanumeric characters and the following symbols amp _ i 3 lt gt Double byte characters cannot be used 7 When the saving is completed click Finish If the saving failed the details of the failure are displayed 8 Onthe IT Security Tool menu click Close A IMPORTANT If any save failures are displayed contact YOKOGAWA Service IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings gt C8 12 C8 2 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller To save the IT security settings on a computer that serves only as a file server or a domain controller computer start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium and click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool The rest of steps are the same as the procedure for an SENG PC EE ALso For more information about how to start the installation menu refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00
27. IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 4 Creating Domain Users gt B2 11 After you run the IT Security Tool on the domain controller the following ProSafe RS domain groups have been created PSF_OPERATOR PSF_ENGINEER PSF_OPC PSF_MAINTENANCE Adding a Domain User to a Domain Group This section describes an example of adding a domain user the user yokogawa to the PSF_MAINTENANCE group TIP For domain users who belong to a domain group which requires administrative rights you also need to per form the procedure in the next section eSetting Administrative Rights In the Active Directory Users and Computers window double click the user that you want to grant the group s rights The properties dialog box for the selected user appears Select the Member Of tab and click Add The Select Groups dialog box appears Click Advanced The advanced settings are displayed in the Select Groups dialog box Click Find Now to display the list of available groups Select the PSF_MAINTENANCE group and click OK Select Groups x Select this obyect type Groups orBukinsecutypincpas Obed Types Erom this location amp Denied RODC Pass Members in this Figure B2 4 4 Select Groups dialog box Search results 5 In the Select Groups dialog box ensure that PSF_MAINTENANCE appears and click OK In the user s properties dialog box ensure that PSF_MAINTENANCE appears in the Me
28. Model CHSKM30 e ProSafe RS license medium Model CHSCM30 e ProSafe RS license sheet with project ID E User Who Performs Update Installation When update installation is performed IT security settings are configured following the instal lation of the ProSafe RS software Update installation must be performed by a user who be longs to the groups shown in the following table Table C4 1 1 Groups to Which the User Who Performs Update Installation Belongs Currently applied se Security model and user management type to be applied curity model and user Ledacvmodel Standard model management type gasy Standalone type Domain Combination type Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE Administrators and PSF_MAINTENANCE NANCE of the domain 1 Standalone Of the local computer Administrators and PSF_MAINTE type NANCE of the local computer 1 2 Domain Combina tion type Legacy model Standard model Administrators and PSF_MAINTE Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE NANCE_LCL of the local computer 1 NANCE of the domain 1 1 Log on the computer while it is connected to the domain 2 While changing the user name and password of the domain administrator are required E Installing Latest Network Driver Before upgrading the software install the latest network driver included in the new ProSafe RS software version to be installed This section explains how to upgrade t
29. The Edit Plan Settings window appears TIP If High performance does not appear under Preferred plan click Show additional plans Select High per formance and then click Change plan settings to the right of it 4 Click Change advanced power settings The Power Options dialog box appears showing the advanced settings TIP Depending on the computer configuration the items of unavailable functions will not be displayed in the step results hereafter 5 Under Hard disk set the setting for Turn off hard disk after to Never Power Options 21x Advanced settings lt Select the power plan that you want to customize and then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power High performance Active High performance Hard disk Turn off hard disk after Setting Minutes EA Desktop background settings Sleep USB settings Power buttons and lid PCI Express Processor power management m Nienka Figure B3 2 3 2 Power Options Advanced Settings 6 Configure the Sleep settings as follows e Sleep after Never e Allow hybrid sleep Off e Hibernate after Never e Allow wake timers Disable IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 23 Power Options Figure B3 2 3 3 Power Options Advanced Settings 7 Set the setting for Power
30. User Consolidated Alarm Management Function CAMS User that was specified when setting up the OPC for HIS A amp E server connection OPC client other than CENTUM VP product 1 Users Who Use OPC Client Service 1 Functions created using CENTUM Data Access Library LHS2412 are also included When FCS Data Setting Acquisition Package PICOT is used If FCS Data Setting Acquisition Package PICOT LHS6710 and HIS type single sign on are used also perform the following setting For Standalone manage On the computer running the package add OFFUSER to the ment PSF_OPC group For Domain or Combination On the computer running the package add OFFUSER to the management PSF_OPC_LCL group E When the computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 is designated as the OPC server to communicate with on the OPC client computer that is not a member of the domain The following table shows the connection information for the case where Domain or Combina tion management is applied and the computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 is desig nated as the OPC server on the OPC client computer that is not a member of the domain For required procedures for connection read the descriptions that follow the table Table D1 1 2 5 Connection information Integration code 0101 0202 03 02 Product 1 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function of CENTUM VP R5 03 Product 2 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or
31. able e Data access is possible by using multiple register read write commands function codes 03 04 and 16 specifying an even number for the beginning reference number and or an odd number for the size of data Error code 10 or 11 hex is not re turned even if an even number is specified for the beginning reference number or an odd number is specified for the size of data 1 This means the case when the version of SENG is R3 02 00 and the case when SENG is upgraded to R3 02 10 but offline downloading to SCS is not yet performed IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 Rev 1 Revision information Title Installation Manual No Jan 2015 4th Edition R3 02 20 or later Oc ee IM 32Q01C50 31E Denotes the release number of the Software Product corresponding to the contents of this Man ual The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued Introduction ProSafe RS document map has been removed descriptions of Safety Protection and A3 A3 C4 2 A3 C8 1 1 B2 3 B5 1 C5 D1 Modification of the Product have been modified Software version has been changed use of Exaquantum has been added Descriptions of Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2003 R2 have been de leted Contents have been restructured Descriptions of Windows Server 2008 have been changed Descriptions of Windows Server 2003 have been deleted and descriptions of Windows Server 2008 have been
32. check box and click Finish The IT Security Tool is exited and the computer is restarted automatically IMPORTANT If any failed setting items are displayed contact YOKOGAWA Service If you are using Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 the Pro gram Compatibility Assistant dialog box may appear after the security settings configuration is completed Even this dialog box appears the settings have been configured successfully so click Cancel to close it For more information about changing the IT security settings refer to C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings on page C8 2 Notes on the Case when NetBIOS over TCP IP is Disabled When the Standard model is selected you can configure to disable NetBIOS over TCP IP With Domain management or Combination management NetBIOS over TCP IP is disabled by default If it is disabled you need to make the following settings for name solution e Standalone management In the LMHOSTS file of each station set the computer names of the stations it needs to access Location of the LMHOSTS Systemroot3 system32 drivers etc ue Systemroot is the directory where the Windows OS is installed Usually it is C Windows Example script in the The following is an example of accessing HISO124 LMHOSTS file HEEE Lmhosts 172 17 1 24 HIS0124 PRE Table B3 5 2 1 LMHOSTS File Settings Station type Stations to be set in the LMHOSTS fil
33. click OK You do not need to restart the computer Setting IP Address for Ethernet 1 Inthe Network Connections window right click the Ethernet icon and select Properties The Ethernet Properties dialog box appears 2 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and then click Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties dialog box appears 3 Select Use the following IP address and set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway for Ethernet as follows e Ifthe computer is to be used in an existing environment specify the values used in that network environment e Ifthe computer is to be used in a new environment specify the standard values de termined based on the station address TIP The standard values for Ethernet are as follows IP address 172 17 lt Domain Number gt lt Station Number gt 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway No setting is required 1 Normally use a standard value However you can also use other address IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 49 A IMPORTANT e In workgroup environment do not change the settings for DNS server address and the settings accessed by clicking Advanced e In Windows domain environment you need to set the DNS server address according to the settings of Windows domain server General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supp
34. log files folder and SYSVOL folder and then click Next The Directory Services Restore Mode Administrator Password DSRM dialog box ap pears Enter the password of the Administrator account used when starting in the Directory Services Restore Mode and click Next The Summary page appears Confirm your selections displayed in the summary and then click Next The setups for Active Directory Domain Services starts The Completing the Active Direc tory Domain Services Installation Wizard page appears Click Finish A message box for restarting the computer to validate the active directory domain serv ices is displayed Click Restart Now IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B2 3 lt B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller gt B2 5 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller In a system that uses the Standard model of security settings you need to run the IT Security Tool on the domain controller as well to apply the Standard model of security settings E Preparing for Running the IT Security Tool 1 2 Log on to the domain controller as an administrative user Perform the following operations regarding NET Framework e On Windows Server 2008 R2 enable NET Framework 3 5 1 e On Windows Server 2008 enable NET Framework 3 0 From the Start menu select All programs gt Administrative Tools gt Active Directory Users and Computers The Activ
35. refer to 1 Overview of license management in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 7 Creating User Accounts gt B3 68 B3 7 Creating User Accounts Create accounts for ProSafe RS When the Standard model is selected in IT security configuration rights to access the installa tion folder registries etc are set by the IT Security Tool based on the access rights granted to the ProSafe RS user groups Therefore you need to register the created user as a mem ber of the appropriate ProSafe RS user group according to the user s role such as engineer and maintenance personnel This section describes the procedures for the cases where the security settings of the Stand ard model with Standalone management or the Legacy model are applied In the case of Standard model with Domain management or Combination management user accounts should be created in the process of setting up the domain environment SEE ALso For more information about creating user accounts in a Windows domain environment refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 E Limitation on User Account Names e 20 characters at maximum e Space tabs and multi byte characters such as half width katakana and Chinese charac ters kanji cannot be used TIP When the Access Control and Operation History Management Package is used and Windows authentication mode is specified
36. turns BAD the data status of PV for S_ANLG_S turns BAD 0x8000 0000 Default in the SCS Constants Builder Therefore if the PV of S ANLG S is referred via FCS or OPC the behavior may change be tween the SCS project created newly in R1 03 or later and the SCS project created in R1 02 If you want the same behavior as that in R1 02 set PV Status of S ANLG_S in the SCS Constants Builder to NO E Notes on Enhanced Integrity Analyzer TIP Stricter Check of Recursive Call in POU Before R1 03 there are cases where a POU containing recursively called FB and FU can be downloaded to SCS In R1 03 or later an error is raised for a POU with recursive calls to pre vent its download to SCS The error detection depends on how the recursive call is implemented during generation or by Integrity Analyzer When upgrading to R1 03 or later make sure that no recursive call is included in POU If any change the logic to exclude the recursive call from the POU Before R1 03 this does not cause an error during Generation Even if a Warning is displayed by Integrity An alyzer a download to SCS is allowed after the Warning is acknowledged Notes on Comparison Operation lt gt on Floating point Data There are cases where comparison operation using equal or lt gt not equal on floating point data does not produce expected results because a round off error may result from re peated arithmetic operations
37. 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 25 Inter SCS Safety Communication Locking Functions To use the functions for locking inter SCS safety communication you need to perform Proce dure E on an SENG of R2 03 or later However if you also want to use the new system FB of SYS_FORCE_EB inter SCS safety communication forcing status management you need to perform Procedure C Automatic IOM Download To use automatic IOM download you need to perform Procedure F on an SENG of R2 03 or later Use the SCS Constants Builder and set so as to enable the automatic IOM download Automatic Scan Period Extension under High CPU Load To use automatic scan period extension you need to perform Procedure F on an SENG of R2 03 or later Use the SCS Constants Builder and set Extend scan period automatically to Yes However if you also want to use the new system FB of SYS_SCANEXT scan period extension indicator you need to perform Procedure C A IMPORTANT If you use automatic scan period extension in a system that does not include SCS Mainte nance Support Tool on SENG or CENTUM HIS you must perform Procedure C on an SENG of R2 03 or later This is because in such a system you need to use the SYS_SCANEXT FB scan period extension indicator to detect whether the SCS is running with an automatically extended scan period Specifying Behavior at Abnormal Calculation To enable specification of the SCS b
38. A1 Howto Read This DoCume Nt ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A1 1 A2 Overview Of Setup Task S vcscciscsssssssnsscccseccscisnnssassrasscessseteonsasasannccanasers A2 1 A2 1 Before You Set U piss icscccciscccccscsteccsccetescscessasveeccensceenceeesedcnssasscctunereesscvesessaxe A2 2 A2 2 Procedures for NeW Setu ccccccceeseesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeesseenneeeeeeeeeeeeeees A2 3 A2 2 1 Setup Procedure for a ProSafe RS System A2 4 A2 2 2 Setup Procedure for SENG c eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeeeeeeeeees A2 6 A2 2 3 Setup Procedure for a File Servet c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeesees A2 9 A2 2 4 Setup Procedure for a Computer Dedicated to License Management shu dus A E E E E EEA E E EEE N A E E nts aes A2 10 A2 3 Explanation for Maintenance 0 cccccccccseeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeneeseeeeeeees A2 11 A3 Requirements for Operation ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A3 1 A3 1 Hardware Requirements cecceceeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeseesseaaeeeseeseenees A3 2 A3 2 Software Requirements cccccceceeeeesseeeneeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeesneaneeeeeeeeeeeneeeesees A3 3 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TocB 1 Installation IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition CONTENTS PART B New SU sicsiscccripecce sie ecareenscuarnscusesecenaunaresabucands B 1 B1 Preparing for the Setup s ssssssssssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
39. Alarm Priority Builder No Alarm Processing Table Builder No 4 Yes Changeable by online change download No Offline download is required E Behaviors at Abnormal Calculation in Application Logic If abnormal calculation occurs in the application logic of an SCS with a system program be fore R2 03 the SCS stops About Behaviors of SCS at Abnormal Calculation e If an overflow or division by zero occurs in operations with REAL type variables or divi sion by zero in operations with integer type variables SCS stops e When floating point data is converted to a DINT number by the ANY_TO_DINT function if the resultant number exceeds the maximum or falls below the minimum integer values i e overflow occurs the SCS stops e For the input to ANY_TO_TIME use a DINT type value in the range from 0 to 86400000 If a value beyond this range is used it cannot return a proper time Note that when a real number value greater than 4294967295 the maximum number of the unsigned 32 bit in teger or smaller than 2147483648 the minimum number of the unsigned 32 bit integer is used the SCS stops e If access to the outside of an array occurs the SCS stops IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 29 Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 This section provides precautions to be made when upgrading the software version from R2 03 to R3 01 Please read precautions at upg
40. Area Connection The network can be identi fied more easily if you rename the local area connection Rename the local area connections as necessary according to the network configuration of the system 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Internet gt Network and Sharing Center The Network and Sharing Center window appears 2 Select Change adapter settings The Network Connections window appears LE Network and Internet Network Connections gt X Search Network Connections P ao Organize Ethernet k Local Area Connection x Network Identifying ae ee Intel R 82578DM Gigabit Networ Yokogawa Vnet Adapter Figure B3 3 3 8 Network Connections Before Renaming TIP If you are using Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 select Manage network connections e If connections are not displayed here the corresponding installations have failed or the drivers are not working properly Address the issues so that the connections are displayed here 3 Right click each of the Local Area Connection icons and select Rename to change the name Table B3 3 3 2 Renaming of Network Connections Network type Display on ERE Connections win Name ow Ethernet Ethernet driver names Ethernet Control bus Yokogawa Vnet Adapter Vnet Vnet IP open communication B Open communication Driver VnetIPOpen IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Networ
41. Because of this some client programs may be come unable to connect to the SCS SOE OPC server IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 9 Upgrading to Version R3 02 00 gt App 4 38 If any client program has become unable to establish connection after the upgrading set the authentication level of COM to None on the SCS SOE OPC server to enable connection TIP If any other YOKOGAWA product coexists on the same computer the authentication level of COM may be set to None according to the operational specifications of the other product 2E For more information about how to set the authentication level of COM on the SCS SOE OPC server refer to m DCOM settings in A2 2 Overview of product security settings in Open Interfaces IM 32Q05B10 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 10 Upgrading to R3 02 10 gt App 4 39 Appendix 4 10 Upgrading to R3 02 10 This section provides cautionary notes for upgrading from R3 02 00 to R3 02 10 Before you upgrade also read the cautionary notes for upgrading to the previous versions that were is sued after the software version currently installed on your computer and perform the required tasks for each upgrade A IMPORTANT When integrating ProSafe RS with CENTUM VP the recommended version of CENTUM VP is R5 03 00 or later E Software Revisions The respective software release number of R3 02 is as follows Software Rel
42. Builder Function of CENTUM VP R5 03 Product 2 a System Generation and Maintenance Function Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or ater Security model Legacy model Standard model User manage Standalone management Domain Combination management ment type Di elas proce None Refer to e When the Standard model is applied ures When the Standard model is applied Add all the user accounts for using SCS Manager of ProSafe RS or System View of CENTUM VP to the CTM_ENGINEER and PSF_ENGINEER groups For Standalone management perform this setting on the computer where SCS Manager of ProSafe RS and System View are used For Domain or Combination management perform this setting on the domain controller SEE ALso For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Domain or Combination management refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Standalone management refer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 11 D1 1 5 Required Settings when Integrating with CENTUM VP R4 01 to R4 03 The same settings are required as those for integrating with CENTUM VP 5 01 or later How ever the security configuration must be done separately use the Securi
43. C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download e Procedure D Setting Definition Items for New Features and Offline Download e Procedure E Clean Project Build and Offline Download e Procedure F Setting Definition Items for New Features Clean Project Build and Offline Download Generally only Procedure A needs to be performed after upgrading the software IMPORTANT You must perform one of the above procedures on SCS projects of all the SCSs that commu nicate with each other by inter SCS safety communication Be sure to perform Procedure A even for the SCSs that do not use new features Otherwise an error may occur during build For more information about the procedures to use new features in each revision refer to C5 Upgrading to R3 02 20 on page C5 1 Appendix 4 Compatibility between Revisions and Cautionary Notes for Upgrading on page App 4 1 Procedure A Opening SCS Projects After installing the latest revision of software in SENG use SCS Manger to open the existing SCS projects created by the older revision software The SCS can continue to run However only the functions supported with older versions can be changed online IMPORTANT e The newer revision SCS Manager can simply open the SCS project created by the older revision SCS Manager However the project created by the older revision workbench can not be opened in the Read Only status It is necessary to open the SCS project in the Re
44. C5 Upgrading to Ra02 20 vic ccssecessescccesetecccsacssanstacteececedemsiaasiecetetacieesiaees C5 1 C6 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees C6 1 C6 1 Uninstallation On SENG wi isis ccces cc sccted cic ceteersceenesnceccendecneeceneeseeeasccnecsesdereens C6 2 C6 1 1 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software C6 3 C6 1 2 Uninstalling the Network Drivers c cceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeeeee C6 5 C6 2 Uninstallation on the computer Dedicated to License Managemenrt tee C7 Reinstalling the ProSafe RS Software ccccccccseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees C7 1 C7 1 When the Computer Used is the Same ccccccccceseeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenees C7 2 C7 2 When the Computer Used is Not the Same ssssesssessseeeeeeeeeeeees C7 6 C8 Maintenance Tasks Related to IT SeCUrity ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C8 1 C8 1 Changing the IT Security SettingS ccccccessseneeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeneeeeeeeens C8 2 C3 1 1 Procedures tor SENG PC ysis nstiineset ninaru i C8 3 C8 1 2 Procedures for a File Server or Domain Controller 05 C8 5 C8 2 Saving the IT Security SettingS cccccceeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeeeee C8 8 C8 2 1 Procedure for SENG PC ccccceceececeeeceeceteeee eee eeeeessenaeeeteeeees C8 9 C8 2 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller C8 12 C8 3 Restoring the IT Security SettingS cc
45. Clean Project The procedure is as follows 1 Using SCS Manager open the old revision project 2 Set the definition items for the new features The items to be set are described in the section of upgrading procedures for each soft ware release number Run Clean Project Run Build Then run Integrity Analyzer and Cross Reference Analyzer for an approval check A IMPORTANT Even if all POUs are displayed in green in the result of checking by Cross Reference Ana lyzer further check is required if Cross Reference Analyzer is unable to detect differences re lated to the definition items of the new features 5 Offline download the project oe For more information about the items that cannot be detected by Cross Reference Analyzer refer to m Other Changes Not Detectable by Cross Reference Analyzer in 8 2 5 Precautions on Cross Refer ence Analyzer in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 3 Upgrading the Computer Dedicated to License Management gt C4 10 C4 3 Upgrading the Computer Dedicated to License Management This section describes how to upgrade the computer dedicated to license management E Upgrade Procedure 1 Install only the license management software from the ProSafe RS software medium TIP When upgrading the computer dedicated to license management you can install the license management software in the same way as when it is in
46. Combination management ment type Te proce Refer to e When the Standard model is applied ures When the Standard model is applied Add the user account for using OPC client services to the CTM_OPC and PSF_OPC groups For Standalone management perform this setting on OPC client computers For Domain or Combination management perform this setting on the domain controller SEE ALso For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Domain or Combination management refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Standalone management refer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 Users who use OPC client services The following table shows the users who use OPC client services Table D1 1 2 4 Users who use OPC client services OPC client service User Report Package LHS6530 User who logged on to Windows Access Administrator Package FDA 21 CFR Part 11 User who logged on to Windows compliant LHS5170 FCS Data Setting Acquisition Package PICOT User who logged on to Windows LHS6710 Continues on the next page IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 7 Table D1 1 2 4 Users who use OPC client services Table continued OPC client service
47. Combination management system the computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 is designated as the OPC server on an OPC client computer that is not a member of the domain E When the computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 is designated as the OPC server to communicate with SEE ALSO The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table Table D1 1 2 1 Connection information Integration code 0101 0202 01 01 Product 1 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function of CENTUM VP R5 03 Product 2 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Security model Legacy model Standard model User manage Standalone management Domain Combination management ment type Required proce Refer to e When the Standard model is applied dures When the Standard model is applied On the OPC server computer add the user account for using OPC client services on OPC client computers to the CTM_OPC and PSF_OPC groups For Domain or Combination management perform this setting on the domain controller For Standalone management create on the OPC server computer a user account with the same name as the local user who uses OPC client services on the OPC client computer and then add the user account to the CTM_OPC and PSF_OPC groups For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Domain or Combin
48. Edition Jan 30 2015 00 C8 3 1 lt C8 3 Restoring the IT Security Settings gt C8 14 Procedure for SENG PC This section describes the procedure for restoring the security settings on an SENG PC E Restoring Procedure 1 Click YOKOGAWA Security gt IT Security Tool from the Windows Start menu The IT Security Tool starts Click Restore The Select Security Setting File page appears Select Security Setting File Setting File B Description of Setting File Setting ltem Description ne Conca Figure C8 3 1 1 Select Security Setting File 3 Click next to the Setting File box The Open dialog box appears 4 Select the file you want to use for restoration and then click Open TIP Of the files that were created when the security settings were saved select the file with hed extension A dialog box appears prompting you to enter the password encryption key for reading the selected file Enter the password encryption key that was set when the file was saved and click OK If the selected file is restorable the details are displayed in the Select Security Setting File page Click Next The Confirm Setting Information page appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 3 Restoring the IT Security Settings gt C8 1 5 Confirm Setting Information Description Sets the Password Policy Create the necessary users and
49. In R1 03 or later if accurate comparison operation lt gt on floating point data is detected Integrity Analyzer displays a warning After upgrading to R1 03 or later if accurate comparison operation lt gt on floating point data is detected a warning is displayed after the upgrade If a warning appears check if the program needs to be enhanced using smaller than lt or greater than gt If the result of the check is no need to change program acknowledge the warning that Integrity Analyzer displayed This will enable a download of the program to SCS E Notes on Changed Password FB If a wrong password for the Password FB is entered from HIS the behavior in R1 03 or later is as follows IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 4 Upgrading to R1 03 gt App 4 1 4 Table Appendix 4 4 1 Change made to Password FB Version Before R1 03 Change in behavior if a wrong password is entered for Password FB In the operation to change MV in the Password FB if user enters a wrong pass word a system alarm is raised and user has to undo the change MV to the previous value If a wrong password is entered a diagnostic information message is displayed to notify it Here the changed MV value remains as is and an ANS or ANS process alarm is raised R1 03 or later If a wrong password is entered an error message for the wrong password is dis played in the dia
50. OPC Pa rameter Setting The SOE OPC Interface Settings dialog box appears In the OPC Security Settings section click Edit The Select Logon Type dialog box appears Select Automatically logon the designated user for connecting OPC server and select Default user of R2 03 and earlier versions and then click OK Setting the logon type with Standard model 1 Log on to the SENG as a member of the PSF_ENGINEER or PSF_ENGINEER_LCL group From the Start menu select All Programs gt YOKOGAWA ProSafe gt SOE OPC Pa rameter Setting The SOE OPC Interface Settings dialog box appears In the OPC Security Settings section click Edit The Select Logon Type dialog box appears Select Automatically logon the designated user for connecting OPC server and select Default user of R2 03 and earlier versions and then click OK Granting remote access permission with Standard model 1 2 Log on to the SENG as a user with administrative rights In the search box displayed at the bottom of the Start menu enter dcomcnfg exe and hit the Enter key IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 2 ProSafe RS and PRM gt D1 15 TIP If a User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes On Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 click Continue 5 The component service window appears Double click the Computer icon then right click the My Computer icon that appears and s
51. ProSafe RS CS 3000 1 CENTUM VP R3 01 R3 02 00 R3 02 10 R3 06 or later R4 01 or later R3 02 20 4 You cannot install ProSafe RS R3 01 or later and CS 3000 software on the same computer Functions of ProSafe RS and CENTUM Release Numbers When using ProSafe RS R3 02 20 CENTUM of release number R5 04 00 or later is recom mended The following table shows the CENTUM software release numbers that are required to use new functions added in each release of ProSafe RS Table A3 2 4 CENTUM VP Release Numbers Required to Use Each Function of ProSafe RS Function of ProSafe RS Release number of CENTUM Display of SMB icon and system alarm messages related to li R5 01 or later cense management when installed on the same computer as HIS e Operation and monitoring of SCSP2 R4 02 or later e Display of annunciator message corresponding to ANN_FUP function blocks e Display of system alarm messages added in ProSafe RS R2 03 1 41 In CENTUM VP of earlier than R4 02 system alarm messages added in R2 03 are not displayed The same messages dis played as when manually executing IOM download are displayed at execution of automatic IOM download Table A3 2 5 CS 3000 Release Numbers Required to Use Each Function of ProSafe RS Function of ProSafe RS Release number of CS 3000 Operation and monitoring of SCSP2 R3 09 or later Display of annunciator message corresponding to ANN_FUP function blocks Display of syste
52. SCS before they can be used In the following the steps are explained for each feature SEE ALso For more information about Procedure B through Procedure F that appear in this section refer to Procedure B Master Database Offline Download on page C4 6 Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 Procedure E Clean Project Build and Offline Download on page C4 8 Procedure F Setting Definition Items for New Features Clean Project Build and Offline Down load on page C4 9 New I O Module SDV53A To use the I O module SDV53A newly supported in R2 03 you need to perform Procedure C New Function Blocks in R2 03 To use the new FBs in R2 03 such as SYS_SCANEXT scan period extension indicator you need to perform Procedure C on an SENG of R2 03 or later Online Change Download From R2 03 the following changes can be made by online change download e Change the scan period e Add or delete input output modules e Rename POUs e Change the type and attributes of FB instances e Change the definitions on SCS Constants Builder To download these changes online you need to perform Procedure E on an SENG of R2 03 or later rie For more information about online changes to SCS with R2 02 or earlier system program refer to m Online Changeable Information on page App 4 26 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4
53. SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program of an SCS that performs Inter SCS safety communication with SCS with system program version R3 02 20 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCSs must be of R1 02 or later Control bus Drivers The control bus drivers that are installed on the computer should be upgraded to the version supplied in R3 02 20 SEE ALso For more information about how to update the control bus driver refer to Upgrading Control Bus Driver on page C4 2 E Basic Procedure for Upgrading To use the features added or modified install the ProSafe RS software R3 02 20 or later and open the existing SCS project E Procedure for Using New and Modified Features The following features added and upgraded in R3 02 20 cannot be used by the basic proce dure for upgrading the revision After the SENG software has been upgraded to R3 02 20 the steps such as offline downloading to SCS are required Follow these steps to use each func tion SEE Atso For more information about settings after upgrading software refer to E Settings after Upgrading Software on page C4 5 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C5 Upgrading to R3 02 20 gt C5 2 ProSafe SLS Communication Function To collect ProSafe SLS data or events in SCS by using the ProSafe SLS communication fun
54. Setup Procedure for a Computer Dedicated to License Management You can provide a computer dedicated to license management according to the scale and op eration policy of the system The following figure shows the setup procedure for a computer dedicated to license management Start Install the license management software Configure IT security settings End Figure A2 2 4 1 Setup Procedure for a Computer Dedicated to License Management E l l l SEE For more information about setting up a computer dedicated to license management refer to B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management on page B6 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 3 Explanation for Maintenance gt A2 11 A2 3 Explanation for Maintenance When you perform the following maintenance tasks refer to Part C e Add licenses and change license assignments e Set up the domain environment later e Back up the system e Upgrade the ProSafe RS software e Find out cautionary notes for upgrading and compatibility with the previous revision e Uninstall the ProSafe RS software e Reinstall the ProSafe RS software e Change save and restore the IT security settings e Troubleshooting IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A3 Requirements for Operation gt A3 1 A3 Requirements for Operation This section explains the hardware and software requirements It also explains the software that
55. Systems Incorporated 4 21 2011 11M8 1001 HW Intel R Network Connections 15 7 176 0 Intel 12 28 2010 137MB 15 71760 E Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable 86 9 0 3 Microsoft Corporation 4 21 2011 596KB 9 0 30729 E MSXML 4 0 SP3 Parser Microsoft Corporation 4 21 2011 147MB 430 2100 0 Bsnagit 913 TechSmith Corporation 4 21 2011 591MB 913 14 E YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS Yokogawa Electric Corporation 6 20 2011 283MB 3 01 00 4 itt r Currently installed programs Total size 469 MB 6 programs installed Figure C6 1 1 1 Programs and Features 2 Select YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS and click Change The Welcome dialog box appears 3 Click Next A dialog box for confirming the uninstallation appears 4 Click Remove Uninstallation starts and a dialog box showing the progress of uninstallation appears TIP If any active license is found a dialog box appears confirming the continuation of the uninstallation process Select Yes to continue the uninstallation The active licenses are deactivated at this point However the license information on the license management station remains unchanged Update the license information on the license management station as necessary IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG gt C6 4 5 Ifa User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes or Allow TIP If you leave the User Account Control dialog box without clicking Yes or A
56. There are two types of personnel in a system where the access control and operation history management is applied administrators of access control and operation history management hereinafter referred to as administrator in this section and engineers After creating user accounts for administrators and engineers add them to the Windows user groups shown in the following table Table B4 5 1 Windows User Groups to which Administrators and Engineers Must Belong Personnel Windows user group to belong to Standard or Strengthened model Legacy model Administrator Either of the following Group with administrator privilege PSF_MAINTENANCE 1 PSF_MAINTENANCE_LCL 1 Engineer One of the following Any group PSF_OPERATOR PSF_ENGINEER PSF_OPERATOR_LCL PSF_ENGINEER_LCL 1 Users belonging to these groups must also have the Windows administrator privileges Make them also belong to the Admin istrators or Domain Admins group E Security Model and User Authentication Mode SEE If you select the Standard model with the IT Security Tool you can select either ProSafe au thentication mode or Windows authentication mode as the user authentication mode of the operation history management function on SENG By default ProSafe authentication mode is selected If you select the Legacy model with the IT Security Tool only ProSafe authentication mode is available You can configure user authentication mode
57. Windows network settings after installing the network driver This section explains the procedures for configuring Windows network settings related to con trol bus Vnet IP open communication and Ethernet assuming settings are made on Win dows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Information of other OS versions is provided as necessary as TIP Cautions on Cable Wiring SEE ALSO When the cable is wired for network connection the Set Network Location dialog box may ap pear For more information about the Set Network Location dialog box refer to C9 2 1 Precaution on Network Cable Connection on page C9 4 E Checking the Network Interface Card TIP Check the network interface card installed in the computer When a Control Bus Interface Card is Installed In a system using V net a control bus interface card is installed in computers In this case configure Windows network settings for control bus communications and Ethernet communi cations When a Vnet IP Interface Card is Installed In a system using Vnet IP a Vnet IP interface card is installed in computers In this case a combination of either control bus communications and Ethernet communica tions or control bus communications and Vnet IP open communications is used Configure the Windows network settings according to the network configuration of the system The Vnet IP open communication refers to Ethernet communication performed on bus 2 of Vnet IP
58. YOKOGAWA software and hardware at the time of publication of the User s Manuals are in stalled If additional precise information about the safety of legacy versions of software or hardware is required a link to the corresponding explanation is provided Please refer to the information according to your system E Station Types A safety control station hereafter referred to as SCS is named according to the type of the safety control unit used in it Table Info 1 Names of SCS and Safety Control Unit Used Name of SCS Model of the safety control unit SCSV1 S SSC10S SSC10D SCSP1 S SSC50S SSC50D SCSP2 S SSC60S SSC60D SCSU1 S SSC57S SSC57D In the User s Manuals the following abbreviations may be used to describe functions of these SCS as a whole IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 SCSV1 Abbreviation of SCSV1 S SCSP1 Abbreviation of SCSP1 S SCSP2 Abbreviation of SCSP2 S SCSU1 Abbreviation of SCSU1 S IM 32Q01C50 31E vi 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 vii Copyright and Trademark Notices E All Rights Reserved The copyright of the programs and online manuals contained in the software medium of the Software Product shall remain with YOKOGAWA You are allowed to print the required pages of the online manuals for the purposes of using or operating the Product however reprinting or reproducing the entire document is strictly pro hibited by the Copyright Law Except as stated above no part
59. amp amp amp Figure B3 2 4 2 Power Options Advanced Settings 6 Configure the Sleep settings as follows e Sleep after Never e Allow hybrid sleep Off e Hibernate after Never IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 29 Power Options Figure B3 2 4 3 Power Options Advanced Settings 7 Configure the Power button and lid settings as follows e Power button action Shut down e Start menu power button Shut down Power Options Figure B3 2 4 4 Power Options Advanced Settings 8 Under Display set the setting for Turn off display after to Never IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 30 Power Options Select the power plan that you want to customize and then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power High performance Active x Setting Shut down Start menu power button Setting Shut down PCI Express Processor power management Display Turn off display after Setting Minutes Never Ee F Adaptive display Setting Off Y Restore plan defaults Figure B3 2 4 5 Power Options Advanced Settings 9 Click OK TIP Configure the UPS settings after installing the ProSafe RS software es For more information about setting up UPS services re
60. and Cross Reference Analyzer for approval check IMPORTANT Even if all POUs are displayed in green in the result of checking by Cross Reference Ana lyzer further check is required if Cross Reference Analyzer is unable to detect differences re lated to the definition items of the new features 4 Offline download the project For more information about the items that cannot be detected by Cross Reference Analyzer refer to m Other Changes Not Detectable by Cross Reference Analyzer in 8 2 5 Precautions on Cross Refer ence Analyzer in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E Procedure E Clean Project Build and Offline Download Some new features require this procedure After upgrading the SENG run Clean Project and Build for the existing project and offline download the project The procedure is as follows 1 Using SCS Manager open the old revision project 2 Run Clean Project 3 Run Build Then use Integrity Analyzer and Cross Reference Analyzer for approval check In the check using Cross Reference Analyzer make sure that all POUs are dis played in green 4 Offline download the project IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Software gt C4 9 Procedure F Setting Definition Items for New Features Clean Project Build and Offline Download Some new features require this procedure This procedure consists of Procedure D plus
61. as follows Note on Changing the Security Model to Legacy Model When you have changed to the Legacy model for a system using Windows authentication which is a user authentication mode available with the access control and operation history management functions you must configure the settings for using ProSafe authentication SEE ALso For more information about required settings for ProSafe authentication mode refer to m Specifying the User Authentication Mode in 16 2 1 Settings for Access Control in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E e m Settings Required When ProSafe Authentication Mode is Selected in 16 2 1 Settings for Ac cess Control in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E e m Tasks Required after Changing User Authentication Mode in 16 3 2 Operations Performed by Administrators in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E Notes on Changing the User Management Type e When you change from Standalone management to Domain Combination management create user groups and user accounts in advance using the domain controller e When you change from Standalone management to Domain Combination management add the computer to the domain before applying the IT security settings e When you change from Domain Combination management to Standalone management you may remove the computer from the domain either before or after applying the IT se curity settings For a system using Wi
62. but the network con nection may not You need to use the TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool and then configure the TCP IP network settings again Running TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool IMPORTANT TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool resets the TCP IP settings of all the network interface cards that are installed in the computer Therefore before you run the TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool you need to write down or save the current settings of the following TCP IPv4 informa tion for every network interface card IP Address e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway 1 Use Windows Explorer to open the TOOLS directory under the following path in the Pro Safe RS software medium Drive of ProSafe RS software medium ProSafe RS TOOLS TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool is installed in the following folder when you install the ProSafe RS soft ware ProSafe RS Installation Folder ProSafe RS YOKOGAWA net tool 2 Right click TcpipInconsistencyRepair cmd and select Run as administrator from the context menu Messages are displayed according to the inconsistencies detected IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 53 If no inconsistency is detected in the network settings click OK to end the tool The computer can be connected on the network normally If any inconsistency is detected click Yes The network settings are reset and a message appears prompting you to restart the
63. button action under Power buttons and lid to Shut down S Power Options Figure B3 2 3 4 Power Options Advanced Settings 8 Under Display set the setting for Turn off display after to Never IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 24 Power Options Select the power plan that you want to customize and then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power High performance Active x Setting Disable USB settings E Power buttons and lid Power button action Setting Shut down PCI Express Processor power management Display Turn off display after Figure B3 2 3 5 Power Options Advanced Settings 9 Click OK TIP Configure the UPS settings after installing the ProSafe RS software res For more information about setting up UPS services refer to B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service on page B3 83 E Password Setting Because security is enhanced in Windows Server 2008 R2 complexity may be required when you set a user password or you may not be able to set a password as intended In this case do the following 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu click Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy The Local security policy window appears 3 Inthe left pane select Security S
64. buttons and lid PCI Express Processor power management Search and Indexing Display E Turn off display after Setting Never amp Adaptive display 1 Multimedia settinas 2B amp amp Restore plan defaults _ eel Figure B3 2 2 5 Advanced Settings in Power Options Dialog Box Display Setting 9 Click OK TIP Configure UPS service settings after installing the ProSafe RS software ries For more information about setting up UPS services refer to B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service on page B3 83 E Windows Defender The Windows Defender software detects and removes spy ware It is recommended to turn off this function because it is not used in ProSafe RS In a domain environment turn off Windows Defender on domain member computers at a time by means of a domain management operation such as Group Policies In a workgroup environment turn off Windows Defender by using either of the following pro cedures e Turning Off Windows Defender in Control Panel e Turning Off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor TIP If Tools of Windows Defender is grayed out turn off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor Turning Off Windows Defender in Control Panel 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Security gt Windows Defender The Windows Defe
65. different limitations are applied RES For more information about the limitations on user account names when using Windows authentication mode of the Access Control and Operation History Management Package refer to mE Creating User Accounts in Windows Authentication Mode on page B4 7 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 7 Creating User Accounts gt B3 69 B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied When the security settings of Standard model with Standalone management are applied user accounts should be created on each computer Follow these steps to create a user account 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu choose Control Panel gt System and Security gt Administrative Tools and double click Computer Management The Computer Management window appears 3 On the tree view in the left pane of the window select System Tools gt Local Users and Groups gt Users 4 Select Action gt New User The New User dialog box appears 5 Add a user account The rest of the steps shows an example of adding a new user ac count OPERATOR r New User User name OPERATOR Full name Description Password eececccees Confirm password seecccceee User must change password at next logon E User cannot change password T Password never expires Z Account is disabled
66. explained Moreover for upgrading from a release older than R1 01 30 to R1 02 it is necessary to read the cautionary notes for upgrading to R1 01 30 together with this sec tion A IMPORTANT In order to use the new features when the ProSafe RS R1 02 is integrated with CS 3000 the release number of the CS 3000 software must be R3 08 or later E Software Revisions Software revision information in release R1 02 is as follows Software Release R1 02 xx 1 e SENG software release number R1 02 xx 1 e SCS system program release number R1 02 xx 1 1 xx varies in accordance with the last two digits of the release number for the software released between R1 02 00 and R1 03 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program on the Inter SCS safety communication with an SCS in R1 02 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCSs must be in R1 02 E Procedures for Upgrading In order to use the added or modified features in the R1 02 install the R1 02 or later software and open the existing SCS Project This will allow you to use the following added modified features in R1 02 e Alarm Off e Modified Online Change Download SEE ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 Cautionary Notes
67. for Online Change Download after Upgrading the SENG to R1 02 or Later After upgrading an SENG to R1 02 or later and if you use the SENG for engineering the proj ect data created by an SENG in an earlier version than R1 02 execute Build first without changing any parameter then perform an online change download If you skip executing operation above and do the following there are cases where unchanged POUs Program Organization Units are downloaded to SCS in the online change download e From the Dictionary View window of the SCS Manager Add Delete Sort the named global instances of FB used by POUs e Add or Delete an existing FU to from POUs IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TIP lt Appendix 4 3 Upgrading to R1 02 gt App 4 9 e In the Link Architecture View window of the SCS Manager Change the order of the user defined FU FB The following warning message appears in the first Build execution after the SENG is upgraded to R1 02 WARNING POUs indexes are modified for next on line change Online change may download others POUs in addition of the modified ones E Cautionary Notes on Using New Features SEE ALSO SEE ALSO Some steps are required before using the new features in the R1 02 The steps and caution ary notes for each feature are as follows For more information about detailed procedures after the upgrade refer to e Procedure B Master Database Offli
68. groups Set pemissions on folders and files for each product Sets the COM authentication level and port range Grants access p Sets firewall policies Stop unnecessary Services Set audit policy Sets the rights required to run products Disable NetBIOS over TCP IP ing t Set read only on removable media This function can not work on Set shared folders Edit registry Figure C8 3 1 2 Confirm Setting Information TIP Items displayed in the Confirm Setting Information page represent the items accessed when restoring the saved security settings Although the descriptions of these items are affirmative sentences it doesn t mean that all of these settings will be applied Note that the status of whether each item is set to be applied or not is not displayed on the screen 7 Confirm the settings and click Next When the setup process is complete the Setup Completed page appears TIP If there are any items that failed to be set a list of failed items is displayed 8 Select the check box for Restart Now and click Finish 9 Click Close to end the IT Security Tool A IMPORTANT If any setup failures are displayed contact YOKOGAWA Service IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 3 Restoring the IT Security Settings gt C8 16 C8 3 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller To restore the IT security settings on a c
69. gt Per sonalization gt Desktop Background The Desktop Background window appears De op Background X gO persnaization Deskop Bahromi A File Edit View Tools Help Choose a desktop background Click a picture to make it your desktop background To use a picture that s not listed browse to the picture and double dick it Figure B3 8 4 1 Desktop Background Window 3 Set Solid Colors for Location select a color of your choice and then click OK 4 Select Screen Saver The Screen Saver Settings dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 82 Screen Saver Settings None Preview 7 eer Pee Watt minutes M On resume displaylogon screen Figure B3 8 4 2 Screen Saver Settings Dialog Box 5 Select None for Screen saver and then click OK 6 Select Display Settings The Display Settings dialog box appears Display Settings 1 1 Generic PnP Monitor on NVIDIA Quadro 600 Figure B3 8 4 3 Display Settings 7 Select Highest 32 bit for Colors and then click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service gt B3 83 B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service You can install uninterruptible power supply hereinafter referred to as UPS software and make various settin
70. if you uninstall the ProSafe RS software the Start menu setting programs and files of the IT Security Tool will not be removed To completely uninstall the IT Security Tool you need to uninstall all the products that use the IT Security Tool and then run the command for uninstalling the IT Security Tool E Deleting and Deactivating the Licenses If there are any active licenses distributed on the SENG PC delete the licenses to deactivate the software packages before uninstalling the ProSafe RS software SEE ALso For more information about how to deactivate software packages on a computer refer to m Deleting a license from a license assigned station in 3 2 1 Modifying license assignments in Li cense Management IM 32Q01C60 31E E Uninstallation Procedure After deactivating the packages deleting the licenses follow these steps to uninstall the Pro Safe RS software 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Programs gt Programs and Features The following window appears EY Control Panel Programs Programs and Features P Gina Programs ahd Feitit s Control Panel Home Uninstall or change a program View installed updates To uninstall a program select it from the list and then click Uninstall Change or Repair Turn Windows features on or a Organize v zr Name Publisher Installed On Size Version WB Adobe Reader X 10 0 1 Adobe
71. later Security model Standard model User management type Domain Combination management Required procedures Refer to e Required procedures for connection Required procedures for connection On the OPC server computer create a user account with the same name as the local user who performs OPC communication on the OPC client computer and then add the user ac count to the CTM_OPC_LCL and PSF_OPC_LCL groups SEE ALso For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Standalone management refer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Domain or Combination management refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 Local Users Who Use OPC Client Service The following table shows the local users who use OPC client services IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 8 Table D1 1 2 6 Local Users Who Use OPC Client Service OPC client service User Report Package LHS6530 User who logged on to Windows OPC client other than CENTUM VP product 1 Users Who Use OPC Client Service 1 Functions created using CENTUM Data Access Library LHS2412 are also included IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 D1 1 3 lt D1 1 CEN
72. lt C8 3 Restoring the IT Security Settings gt C8 13 C8 3 Restoring the IT Security Settings You can restore the security settings of a local computer that were saved by using the Save function E Preparation for Restoration According to the user management type of the security settings to be restored the computer may be required to join a domain or removed from a domain To restore to the Legacy mode or Standard model with Standalone management the computer needs to be removed from a domain To restore to the Standard model with Domain or Combination management the computer needs to join a domain E User Who Performs Restoring Log on as a user who belongs to the groups shown in the following table Table C8 3 1 Groups to Which the User Who Restores the Security Settings Belongs Security model and user management type to be restored to Standard model Legacy model Standalone type Domain Combination type Administrators and PSF_MAINTE Administrators of the lo Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE_LCL of the local computer 1 cal computer NANCE of the local computer Domain Admins and PSF MAINTE NANCE of the domain 4 Log on as a user who belongs to these groups when the PSF_MAINTENANCE_LCL group does not exist on the local com puter that is when the security model and user management type set before restoration is Legacy model or Standard model with Standalone management IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th
73. management create a user account with the same name as the user who uses SCS Manager on the computer where the CENTUM VP project is placed and then add the user account to the CTM_ENGINEER group For Domain or Combination management add the user account for using SCS Manager to the CTM_ENGINEER group on the domain controller EE oe Atso For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Domain or Combination management refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Standalone management refer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 10 D1 1 4 CENTUM VP System Builder Function and ProSafe RS Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function Package By connecting CENTUM VP System Builder Function and ProSafe RS Safety System Gener ation and Maintenance Function Package you can perform simulation tests of SCS using SCS simulator of ProSafe RS E Enabling SCS simulation tests using SCS simulator The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table Table D1 1 4 1 Connection information Integration code 0102 0201 03 02 Product 1 System
74. of R3 02 00 or later Writing to a Single Holding Register by Modbus Slave Communication To enable writing to a single holding register in SCS which is a Modbus slave from a Modbus master you need to perform Procedure D on an SENG of R3 02 00 or later IOM Reset Function To use the IOM reset function you need to perform Procedure B on an SENG of R3 02 00 or later E Cautionary Note on Upgrading the OS from Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Note the following point if your upgrading of the ProSafe RS software involves upgrading the OS from Windows XP Windows Server 2003 to a later version OS If any of the values comprising an IP address of SCS is set to a value where 0 is in the upper digit and 8 or 9 is contained in the lower digits for example 08 and 09 on the Connection Properties dialog box in Workbench of the SENG software the SENG can communicate with the SCS properly as long as the SENG is running on Windows XP Windows Server 2003 With a later version OS an error will occur in the following operations e Online change download e Starting the I O lock window e Starting the debug mode e Checking by the Database Validity Check Tool To enable proper operation delete 0 in the upper digit and perform an offline download E Cautionary Notes on Upgrading the SCS SOE OPC Server When the Standard model of IT security settings are applied the authentication level of COM is set to Connect during upgrading to R3 02
75. of the online manuals may be reproduced transferred sold or distributed to a third party in any manner either in electronic or written form including with out limitation in the forms of paper documents electronic media and transmission via the network Nor it may be registered or recorded in the media such as films without permission E Trademark Acknowledgments e CENTUM ProSafe Vnet IP and STARDOM are registered trademarks of YOKOGAWA e Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows Server Visual Basic Visual C and Vis ual Studio are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries e Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor porated e Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation e HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation e Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric SA e All other company and product names mentioned in the User s Manuals are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies e TM or mark are not used to indicate trademarks or registered trademarks in the User s Manuals e Logos and logo marks are not used in the User s Manuals IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TocA 1 Installation IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition CONTENTS PART A OV GRVICW iaccncdastpetecpietnctgucoriecanetiedtoncarcienuenasuedins A 1
76. or later If you use SCS Link Transmission on SCS IP you need to have the SCP451 which supports SCS Link Trans mission If you use SCS Global Switch Communication via Vnet IP you may need to update the CPU module of the FCS of CENTUM For further information please contact our sales office Grouping Override FB Before using the Grouping override FB you need to complete the Procedure C CS 3000 system must be upgraded to R3 08 50 or later Structured Text ST For using the ST language in ProSafe RS you need to complete the Procedure D Use the Multi Language Editor to create application in ST Password FB Before using the upgraded Password FB in R1 03 you need to complete the Procedure B CS 3000 system must be upgraded to R3 08 50 or later Enhanced CENTUM Integration for ANLG_S Before using the enhanced CENTUM Integration in R1 03 for the ANLG_S block you need to complete the Procedure C CS 3000 system must be upgraded to R3 08 50 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 4 Upgrading to R1 03 gt App 4 1 3 Notes on Upgrading SCS Project in R1 02 to R1 03 or Later With the SCS project created in R1 02 no data status is attached to the PV of the mapping block S_ANLG_S for ANLG _S But in R1 03 or later a data status is attached to the PV of the mapping block S_ANLG_S In R1 03 or later if the status of IN terminal of ANLG_S FB for the mapping block S ANLG_S
77. server if it is not a domain member now use the file holding the initial security settings that were saved while it was standalone If it is a domain member now use the file holding the initial security settings that were saved after it joined the domain 5 After restoring is completed restart the computer For a file server if its domain membership is to be changed add to or remove from the domain 7 Start the installation menu again and click Setting IT Security File server domain control ler use to start the IT Security Tool 8 Click Setup 9 Select the security model and the user management type you want to change to The rest of steps are the same as the procedure for the first time setup For more information about how to start the installation menu refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 For more information about first time setup of IT security settings on a file server refer to B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server on page B5 2 For more information about first time setup of IT security settings on the domain controller refer to B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller on page B2 5 For more information about restoring the IT security settings on the file server or domain controller refer to C8 3 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller on page C8 16 When Changing from Standard Model Standalone Manageme
78. software to R2 01 10 Ay IMPORTANT e When integrating ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP the new features added to ProSafe RS R2 01 are supported only in CENTUM VP R4 01 and later versions e Ifyou plan to manage ProSafe RS computers in Windows domain environment the Win dows domain environment settings should be performed before performing the installa tion E Software Revisions Software revision information in release R2 01 is as follows Software Release R2 01 xx 1 e SENG software release number R2 01 xx 2 e SCS system program release number R2 01 xx 2 1 xx stands for the revisions after releasing R2 01 00 2 For R2 01 10 xx stands for 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The earlier version of SCS can performs inter SCS safety communication with the SCS that has R2 01 system program must be a version of R1 01 30 or later If the inter SCS safety communication is routing Vnet IP the two version of system programs in the SCSs should be standardized to R1 02 or a later version Control bus Drivers The control bus drivers installed on the computer should be upgraded to the version supplied at R2 01 R2 01 10 The ProSafe RS R2 01 control bus drivers are compatible with the control bus drivers provi ded in CENTUM VP R4 01 E Basic Procedure of Upgrading Installation When using the added or changed software features the installation should be performed and opening the existing SCS projects with the instal
79. the behaviors of AlO DIO modules when the SCS system program revi sion is earlier than R2 02 SEE ALso For more information about the setting items in I O Parameter Builder that require IOM download refer to A4 4 Items set for analog inputs in Safety Control Station Reference IM 32Q03B10 31E A4 5 Items set for analog outputs in Safety Control Station Reference IM 32Q03B10 31E A4 6 Items set for discrete inputs in Safety Control Station Reference IM 32Q03B10 31E A4 7 Items set for discrete outputs in Safety Control Station Reference IM 32Q03B10 31E Behavior of Input Modules At the time of online change the data status of all channels of the target module become BAD and the diagnostic information message IOM Fail appears The input signals of all channels of the module are processed according to the Input Processing at Fault set tings If on demand HART communication with PRM is performed the HART communication is discontinued during the IOM Fail status On completion of online change download the channels data automatically return to the values input to the channels and all data statuses become GOOD A diagnostic information message indicating that the input module has recovered to nor mal is output For dual redundantly configured I O modules the odd numbered module takes the con trol right TIP If any setting items that require IOM download and the setting of I
80. the computer 5 Restart the computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 52 E Procedure 6 Repair TCP IP Settings TIP TIP TIP Before you install the ProSafe RS software run the TCP IP Inconsistency Detect Tool If any inconsistency is found use the TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool and configure the TCP IP settings again On a computer where the control bus driver or Vnet IP open communication driver had ever been uninstalled the TCP IPv4 network settings of IP addresses subnet masks and default gateway addresses may be lost every time the computer is restarted This problem is caused by errors of the Windows OS Running the TCP IP Inconsistency Detect Tool 1 Use Windows Explorer to open the TOOLS directory under the following path in the Pro Safe RS software medium Drive of ProSafe RS software medium ProSafe RS TOOLS TCP IP Inconsistency Detect Tool is installed in the following folder when you install the ProSafe RS software ProSafe RS Installation Folder ProSafe RS YOKOGAWA net tool 2 Right click TcpiplnconsistencyDetector cmd and select Run as administrator from the context menu Messages are displayed according to the inconsistencies detected 3 Click OK to end the tool If no inconsistency is detected the computer can be connected on the network normally If no inconsistency is detected the Windows system continues to work
81. the installation menu does not appears double click Launcher exe in the top folder of the software medium using Explorer Click ProSafe RS software The Welcome dialog box appears if all the Windows redistribution modules required for ProSafe RS have been installed Proceed to step 6 The dialog box for confirming module installation appears if any of Windows redistribution modules required for ProSafe RS have not been installed Click Install in the module installation confirmation dialog box Module installation starts If the dialog box for confirming the privilege setting appears reboot the computer and log on again a Click OK and reboot the computer b After rebooting the computer log on again as the same user The Welcome dialog box appears automatically Click Next in the welcome dialog box The dialog box for confirming installation setup appears If a different version of control bus driver or Vnet IP open communication driver is already installed a dialog box appears prompting you to update the driver Confirm the message and click OK To update the control bus driver uninstall the existing driver and then install the new one after you install the Pro Safe RS software To update the Vnet IP open communication driver install the new driver after you in stall the ProSafe RS software After updating the Vnet IP open communication driver disable the driver if the computer is to be connec ted to Ethernet
82. the security settings on a computer that serves only as a file server or a domain controller computer A IMPORTANT When you change the IT security settings on a file server or domain controller computer pre pare the initial security settings that were saved before using the IT Security Tool E User Who Changes IT Security Settings on a File Server Table C8 1 2 1 Groups to Which the User Who Changes the Security Settings Belongs Currently applied security model and user management Security model and user management type to be applied Standard model Legacy model Standalone type Domain Combination type type Administrators Administrators and of the local PSF_MAINTENANCE of computer Local Group 1 Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE NANCE of the domain 1 2 Legacy model i 2 3 Stand Standalone type Domain Combina Administrators and PSF_MAINTENANCE of the local computer 1 Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE_LCL of the local computer 1 2 Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE of the local computer 1 3 Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE NANCE of the domain 1 2 tion type If any other YOKOGAWA product coexists in the computer the user also needs to be a member of the MAINTENANCE group of the coexisting product For example if CENTUM VP coexists also add the user to the CTM_MAINTENANCE gr
83. 0 2015 00 lt B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server gt B5 6 Select Security Model Setting Model Description of Setting File Setting Item Description Figure B5 1 2 Select Security Model 3 From the Setting Model drop down list select a security model for the file server You can select from the following four models Table B5 1 2 Security Models for a File Server Model Description Select this model to apply Legacy model to the file pile ServeriLegacy Model server regardless of the user management type Select this model to apply Standard model to the file server when the user management type is Stand alone management File Server Standard Model with Standalone Man agement Select this model to apply Standard model to the file server when the user management type is Domain management File Server Standard Model with Domain Manage ment Select this model to apply Standard model to the file server when the user management type is Combina tion management File Server Standard Model with Combination Man agement 4 Click Next The Confirm Setting Information page appears TIP If you click Detail here the Select Setting Items page appears 5 The subsequent steps are the same as those for the IT security setting configuration after installing the ProSafe RS software SFE For more information about t
84. 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Continues on the next page 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 1 Setting Switches gt App 1 3 Table Appendix 1 2 Station Numbers and DIP Switch Positions Table continued Station number DIP switch bit number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 60 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 61 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 62 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 63 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 64 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 2 Procedure for Erasing VI702 Internal Settings gt App 2 1 Appendix 2 Procedure for Erasing VI702 Internal Settings If you intend to use a VI702 card used in another system for a system configured with Pro Safe RS only delete the settings within the card using the following procedure 1 Turn off the power of the computer For safety remove the power plug from the outlet 2 Set the DIP switches SW1 for the domain number on the VI702 as follows Table Appendix 2 1 Setting of DIP Switches for Domain Number Setting SW1 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Parity MSB LSB 3 Set the DIP switches SW2 for the station number on the VI702 as follows Table Appendix 2 2 Setting of DIP Switches for Station Number Setting SW2 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Parity MSB LSB 4 Check that Bit 1 through Bit 4 of the DIP switche
85. 1 1 2 CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package D1 5 D1 1 3 CENTUM VP System Builder Function and ProSafe RS CENTUM VP CS 3000 Integration Engineering Package D1 9 D1 1 4 CENTUM VP System Builder Function and ProSafe RS Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function Package D1 10 D1 1 5 Required Settings when Integrating with CENTUM VP R4 01 to PRA Oi sates Neat hearts aces epee E Reade Panera eas D1 11 D1 1 6 Required Settings when Integrating with CS 3000 R3 06 to R3 09 nE EE A EE TE A E EE T D1 12 D1 2 ProSafe RS and PRM ccccccccsseeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeseneeesseeseseeeeesseeeeeseeeeess D1 13 D1 2 1 SOE OPC Interface Package and PRM Server D1 14 D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeesneeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeneenees D1 16 D1 3 1 ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package and Exaquantum PIMS SI GI E E E E E E E E D1 17 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 Installation TocApp 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition CONTENTS Appendix Appendix 1 Setting SwitChes ccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 1 1 Appendix 2 Procedure for Erasing VI702 Internal Settings App 2 1 Appendix 3 Antistatic Precautions When Handling Hardware ajc sia Dee ta epee Since anna occa keen eee E E E A App 3 1 Appendix 4 Compatibility between Revisions and Cautionary Notes for MIG CUI Gs
86. 1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum gt D1 21 7 On the SENG and the computer installed with Exaquantum perform the setting for using Exaquantum as an OPC client SEE ALso For more information about configuring the DCOM settings refer to a DCOM settings in A2 2 Overview of product security settings in Open Interfaces IM 32Q05B10 31E When the Legacy model is applied to ProSafe RS and the Standard model to Exaquantum 1 Set the logon type on the SENG 2 Onthe SENG create QTM_PROCESS which is the Exaquantum program user account a Insert the Exaquantum software medium and start the command prompt window then move to the following folder Drive Tools b Run the following command CreateQTMProcess exe The QTM_PROCESS user account is created 3 Onthe SENG create the same user account as the logon user account for running Exa quantum 4 On the computer installed with Exaquantum create the EXAUSER user account The password should also be EXAUSER 5 Add the EXAUSER user you have created to the following user group on the computer installed with Exaquantum e In the case of standalone management or when combination management is applied on some computers QTM_OPC e In the case of domain management or when combination management is applied on all computers QTM_OPC_LCL 6 On the SENG and the computer installed with Exaquantum perform the setting for using Exaquantum as an OPC client IM 32Q01C
87. 1 5 Connection information Standard model applied ProSafe RS and Exaquantum version earlier than R2 60 Integration code Product 1 0202 0801 02 02 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Product 2 PIMS server of Exaquantum R2 20 or later but earlier than R2 60 Security model Standard model ProSafe RS Exaquantum User manage ment type of Pro Safe RS Standalone management Domain Combination management Required proce dures Refer to e Setting the logon type and e When the Standard model is applied to Pro Safe RS and the Legacy model to Exaquantum ALso For more information about the details on setting up an OPC client refer to A3 Setup for using the OPC client in Open Interfaces IM 32Q05B10 31E Setting the Logon Type To connect Exaquantum with an SENG OPC server running the SOE OPC interface pack age of ProSafe RS R3 01 00 or later you need to set the logon type on the SENG before hand After performing this setting perform the required setting on Exaquantum 1 Log in to the system as a user belonging to PSF_ENGINEER or PSF_ENGINEER_LCL 2 From the Start menu select All Programs gt YOKOGAWA ProSafe gt SOE OPC Pa rameter Setting The SOE OPC Interface Settings dialog box appears 3 Click the Edit in OPC Security Settings A dialog box where you can select a type of logon to the OPC server appears IM 32Q01C50 31E
88. 2 RAM read write error failure of VF702 VF701 VI702 V1701 card 000109 Address overlap error 00010a Bus configuration error wrong bus connector connection 00010b Dip switch station number parity error 00010c Dip switch domain number parity error 00010d Inappropriate dip switch station number setting 00020013 ces alae number may be detected in the case of bus connector connection mis akes 1 In the code a 2 digit number 00 is displayed at the position of for VF702 VF701 while others for VI702 VI701 If the driver still does not start other possible causes may be a failure of the control bus inter face card or Vnet IP interface card or conflicts with other devices Replace the control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface card or remove the other devices from the computer Duplicate Instances of the Installer You cannot start two instances of the installer If you start a second instance a warning mes sage appears Click OK and terminate the installer you started later The processing of the installer started first continues E Error Message is Displayed during Network Driver Installation 1 If an error message is displayed when you click Don t Install in the Windows Security dialog box that appears during installation of a network driver perform the following tasks Would you like to install this device software Name Yokogawa Network adapters a Publisher Yokogawa Electric Corpo
89. 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 4 C9 2 1 Precaution on Network Cable Connection On Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 the Set Network Location dialog box may appear when you connect the cables for network connection If the dialog box appears select Public network Select a location for the Network network This computer is connected to a network Windows will automatically apply the correct network settings based on the network s location Home network F all the computers on this network are at your home and you recognize them this is a trusted home network Don t choose this for public places such as coffee shops or airports Work network If all the computers on this network are at your workplace and you recognize them this is a trusted work network Don t choose this for public places such as coffee shops or airports i Public nctwork i If you don t recognize all the computers on the network for example you re in a coffee shop or airport or you have mobile broadband this is a public Treat all future networks that I connect to as public and don t ask me again Help me choose Figure C9 2 1 1 Set Network Location Dialog Box TIP On Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 select Public location IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 5 C9 2 2 Problems Related to Installation and Deletion of Dri
90. 50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 1 Setting Switches gt App 1 1 Appendix 1 Setting Switches You can set the domain number and station number by configuring the setting switches on the printed circuit board of the control bus interface card and Vnet IP interface card E Domain Numbers and DIP Switch Positions The following table lists the domain numbers and corresponding setting switch positions for the control bus interface card and Vnet IP interface card Set the DIP switches as shown in the table to adjust to the required domain number Table Appendix 1 1 Domain Numbers and DIP Switch Positions IM 32Q01C50 31E Domain minibee DIP switch bit number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 6 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 10 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 11 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 12 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 14 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 16 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 17 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 18 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 19 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 20 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 21 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 22 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 23 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 24 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 26 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 27 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 28 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 29 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 30 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 31 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Ath Edition J an 30 2015 00 lt Append
91. Appendix 4 9 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading cccceeeeeeee App 4 37 Appendix 4 10 Upgrading to R3 02 10 ccccceceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees App 4 39 Appendix 4 10 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading ccceceeeeeee App 4 40 Appendix 4 10 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions ccee App 4 41 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A Overview gt A 1 A Overview This section explains how to read this document types of ProSafe RS setup tasks and their workflows and system requirements IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A1 How to Read This Document gt A1 1 A1 How to Read This Document This document explains the setup procedures for the ProSafe RS software This document does not touch upon installation procedures of Windows OS related service packs and Mi crosoft security patches To use the software packages installed on an SENG licenses must be distributed to and acti vated on the SENG using a program called License Manager Procedures for the tasks per formed using License Manager is described in the License Management IM You are guided to refer to the License Management IM as necessary in the explanation of setup procedures You are also guided to refer to the Security Guide IM for information about functions that rein force security of the system SEE ALso For more information about the procedure for installing the Windows
92. B2 7 1 1 Implementing Time Synchronization V net Not Synchronize to UTC EE i ALso For more information about how to configure a station as the SNTP server refer to E Setting a Station as the SNTP Server on page B2 22 E For Vnet IP Synchronize to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Introduce an SNTP server and make it synchronize with UTC Configure the domain con troller and the Vnet IP system so that they will reference the time of the same SNTP serv er IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment gt B2 21 e On the computers connected on Vnet IP do not use the Windows W32Time service to perform time synchronization If used times on the computers are synchronized to the time on the domain controller and synchronization with the SNTP server is prevented Domain Controller Synchronize Ethernet Vnet IP SNTP Time Master Computer Server SENG etc Synchronizer e PY eereeseees el o t Pe Vnet IP e Vnet IP time synchronization je ee ef Cee eee Pecoocoooooooooooo000009 SCS SCS Figure B2 7 1 2 Implementing Time Synchronization Vnet IP Synchronize to UTC E For Vnet IP Not Synchronize to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC Configure a station connected to the Vnet IP domain as the SNTP server Times on the com puter
93. C on SENG in R3 01 or later Support for Real Value Entry to ANLG1002D ANLGVOTER In order to enter real values to ANLG1002D ANLGVOTER you need to perform Procedure B on an SENG R3 01 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 31 Appendix 4 8 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions This section describes the specifications and precautions of SCS with a system program be fore R3 01 that are critical to safety as the information on compatibility Please read this sec tion if you use SCS with a system program before R3 01 E Function Block Parameters The function block operation specifications have been changed in the SCS system program release number R3 01 Support for Analog Input Modules for Thermocouple RTD In revisions earlier than R3 01 the following function blocks were able to handle normalization data from 0 to 100 only with their parameters Table Appendix 4 8 2 1 Function Blocks whose Parameters were Changed in R3 01 Function block Parameter ANLG1002D IN1 IN2 DEL VAL OUT ANLGVOTER IN1 IN2 IN3 DEL VAL OUT ANLG_S IN HYS ANLGI IN HYS VEL IN VL HYS ANLG1002D Due to the specification changes of ANLG1002D parameters the operations of VAL on SCS are changed as shown in the following table Table Appendix 4 8 2 2 Specification of VAL Earlier than R3 01 R3 01 or later 25 to 125 If you specify a
94. CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 4 D1 1 1 CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and ProSafe RS Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function Package Connecting CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and ProSafe RS Safe ty System Generation and Maintenance Function Package or SOE Viewer Package enables historical information of CENTUM VP HIS to be viewed on ProSafe RS SOE Viewer E Viewing Historical Information of CENTUM VP on ProSafe RS SOE Viewer The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table TIP You can also use the same procedures to view the SOE event messages of ProSafe RS on the CENTUM SOE Viewer Table D1 1 1 1 Connection information Integration code 0101 0201 03 02 0101 0251 03 02 0153 0201 03 02 Product 1 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function of CENTUM VP R5 03 SOE Viewer Package of CENTUM VP R5 03 Product 2 Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later SOE Viewer Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Security model Legacy model Standard model User manage Standalone management Domain Combination management ment type Required proce Refer to e When the Standard model is applied dures When the Standard model is applied Add
95. CENTUM VP version is earlier than R5 01 one of the following packages must be in stalled on the computer using the CENTUM VP key code rather than through operation of the License Manager before you install the ProSafe RS software ree For more information about installation of CENTUM VP software refer to CENTUM VP Installation IM 33K01C10 50E CENTUM VP Installation IM 33M01A20 40E E Installation on the Computer for Integration of CENTUM SOE Viewer In the case of system configurations integrating CENTUM it is possible to display SOE Se quence of Events of SCS on the CENTUM SOE Viewer This is referred to as integration of CENTUM SOE Viewer The ProSafe RS software package licenses are not required With CENTUM VP R5 01 or later version perform the following tasks on the computer where you use the SCS simulator Either task can be performed first e Install CENTUM software and grant a license for the CENTUM SOE Viewer package LPC6920 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B8 Installing the Functions that Operate with CENTUM VP Licenses gt B8 2 e Install ProSafe RS software If the CENTUM VP version is earlier than R5 01 the CENTUM SOE Viewer package must be installed on the computer using the CENTUM VP key code rather than through operation of the License Manager before you install the ProSafe RS software In order to display SOE of SCS on the CENTUM SOE Viewer it is necessary to connect the comp
96. CHS5170 Access Control and Operation History Management Package use the Operation History Management Setup Tool and Engi neers Account Builder to perform required setting For more information about how to create Windows user accounts refer to B3 7 Creating User Accounts on page B3 68 For more information about the explanation of the procedure involved in making security settings for opera tion history management databases refer to B4 5 2 Security Settings for the Operation History Database on page B4 9 For more information about the precautions to be followed when setting the access control operation history management function refer to 16 2 Setting Up Access Control Operation History Management in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 5 Setup when Using the Access Control and Operation History Management Package gt B4 9 B4 5 2 Security Settings for the Operation History Database The administrator must specify the folder for storing the operation history database by using the operation history management setting tool Set the security of the folder for storing the op eration history database at proper timing before starting to use the operation history manage ment function This section explains the procedures to configure security settings when the operation history database is placed on an SENG PC and when it is placed on a file server A
97. Domain Environment on page B2 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 5 E Set Up Each Station Set up SENG file server and other stations to be used in the ProSafe RS system SEE ALso For more information about the procedure for setting up an SENG refer to A2 2 2 Setup Procedure for SENG on page A2 6 For more information about the procedure for setting up a file server refer to A2 2 3 Setup Procedure for a File Server on page A2 9 For more information about the procedure for setting up a computer dedicated to license management refer to A2 2 4 Setup Procedure for a Computer Dedicated to License Management on page A2 10 The Station You Must Set Up First In a ProSafe RS system you must first set up the license management station which is used to grant licenses for software packages Software packages installed on other stations become available for use once the stations ac cept the licenses distributed from the license management station E Set Up the Hardware of SCS and Devices Used for Connection between Domains Set up the hardware of SCS and devices used for connection between domains SEE ALso For more information about setting up the hardware of SCS and devices for connection between domains refer to B7 Configuring the Hardware of SCS and Devices for Connection between Domains on page B7 1 E Set Up Time Synchro
98. Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TIP SEE ALSO TIP lt Appendix 4 4 Upgrading to R1 03 gt App 4 1 2 New Input Output Modules SDV521 SDV531 L Before using the Input Output modules newly supported by R1 03 you need to complete the Procedure C New Optical ESB Bus Repeater Modules SNT411 SNT511 Before using the Optical ESB Bus Repeater Modules newly supported by R1 03 you need to complete the Procedure D You need to set parameters using the SCS Constants Builder and I O Parameter Builder For using SNT411 SNT511 SCP451 processor module which supports the SNT411 SNT511 needs to be prepared For further information please contact our sales office For more information about setting parameters for Optical ESB Bus Repeater Modules refer to a SCS Tab in 3 1 3 SCS Constants Builder in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E m Items Set for Nodes in 4 4 I O Parameter Builder in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E Using the New FBs in the R1 03 Before using the new FBs in the R1 03 follow the Procedure C on SENG in R1 03 or later For Using the Online Change Function for Input Output Module Channels Before using the Online change function for Input Output module channels you need to com plete the Procedure B SCS Link Transmission Before using the SCS Link Transmission you need to complete the Procedure C CS 3000 system must be upgraded to R3 08 50
99. For more information about creating user accounts refer to B3 7 Creating User Accounts on page B3 68 E Configure Windows Environment Settings for Each User Configure Windows environment settings for each user IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 8 ALso For more information about configuring Windows environment settings for each user refer to B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User on page B3 72 E Set Up the Uninterruptible Power Source UPS Service If necessary set up the uninterruptible power source UPS service oe For more information about configuring the UPS service refer to B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service on page B3 83 E Configure Function Specific Settings Configure the settings specific to certain functions of the SENG SEE ALso For more information about configuring the settings specific to each function of SENG refer to B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG on page B4 1 E Set Up for Connection with Other Systems As necessary set up for connection with other YOKOGAWA products E ALso For more information about the settings required to connect with other YOKOGAWA products refer to D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA products on page D1 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 9
100. For more information about security models refer to 2 Security Models in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E E User Management Types The Standard model of security settings are applied in the following three types according to the selected user management type With the Legacy model you can select only Standalone management as the user management type IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 60 Domain Management Select this option when managing user and group accounts using the Windows domain con troller The groups must be created on the domain controller prior to configuring the security setting Standalone Management Select this option when managing user and group accounts for each computer without using the Windows domain controller Although user accounts are created on each computer in this case user groups and the user management method must match on all related computers Combination Management Combination management refers to a method of user management that combines the Domain management and the Standalone management Combination management mainly manages the domain users nevertheless it is also designed under the assumption that the workgroups users are also managed for routine management Unlike Domain management however this allows more operations to be performed with the administrative rights of a local computer in creasing sec
101. G 1 0 Lock Window In R1 01 30 version the process of getting data from SCS and displaying them on I O Lock window is changed This change will become valid after Procedure B is performed on R1 01 30 or later version SENG Inter SCS Safety Communication WARNING After upgrading SENG to R1 01 30 or later version for the first time offline download to an SCS is performed while the SCS is running inter SCS communication with other SCSs the Procedure B needs to be performed on R1 01 30 or later version SENG for all the communi cated SCSs When offline download to the SCS that is running inter SCS communication with other SCSs it is necessary to take measures on the other SCSs so as not to cause a nui sance tripping SCS Start Action when Applied with IRIG B In R1 01 30 version the SCS start action is changed under the circumstance that the SCS is applied with IRIG B but the IRIG B receiver is not connected This change will become valid after Procedure B is performed on R1 01 30 or later version SENG Handling Messages during SCS Start In R1 01 30 version how the SCS during start handles the SOE data and diagnostic messag es occurred before SCS stopped is changed This change will become valid after Procedure B is performed on R1 01 30 or later version SENG IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 1 Upgrading to R1 01 30 gt App 4 4 A IMPORTANT When the SCS is restarted by Master Database Offline Downl
102. GOWS Tesncersesi iono B3 73 B3 8 2 Configuring on Windows Vista ceeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeettaeeeeeee B3 76 B3 8 3 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 R2 B3 78 B3 8 4 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 B3 81 B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service B3 83 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG cee B4 1 B4 1 Online Manual Setting cccccccccccsseecccccsscseescecssteceseccsseeceeeessceeessedsenesseessees B4 2 B4 2 Settings of Project Database Folder cccccsccccceeeeenteeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesenees B4 3 B4 3 Settings for Message Cache TOoll cccccssseeeeeeseeneeeeeeeseneeeenseeeeeneneneeeenees B4 4 B4 4 Settings Required for OPC Communication cccececesesseeeeeseeneeeenens B4 5 B4 5 Setup when Using the Access Control and Operation History Management Package ssccccesesencceeessseeeeeeseenseeeeseeeneeeeeseseneeeneesseeeeenseas B4 6 B4 5 1 Setup Procedure when Using Access Control and Operation History Management Functions ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees B4 8 B4 5 2 Security Settings for the Operation History Database B4 9 Setting Up a File SPV Ci icc oat tt ks neinni neniani B5 1 B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server B5 2 B5 2 Setting Up the File Server Function on SENG cccceesssseeeeeeeeneeeenens B5 8 B5 3 Setting Up the Computer that Serves as Both File Server and Li
103. In a system using Vnet IP open communications bus 1 is normally used for control bus communications and bus 2 is used for Ethernet communications If bus 1 fails bus 2 is used for both control bus communications and Ethernet communications E Vnet IP Network Configurations and Windows Network Settings Vnet IP network configurations and their required Windows network settings are describes as follows IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 38 Ethernet Ethernet communication 172 17 1 64 172 17 1 63 172 17 1 62 E E E Computer 1 Computer 2 Computer 3 IP IP 192 168 1 128 192 168 1 126 Vnet IP Bus 1 icati 192 168 129 128 192 168 129 126 ue 1 Control communication Bus 2 Control communication E Ethernet Interface Card or Onboard NIC IP Vnet IP Interface Card Figure B3 3 3 1 Network Configuration and Interface Vnet IP and Ethernet are Installed Computer 1 Computer 2 Computer 3 IP IP 192 168 1 128 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 124 192 168 129 128 192 168 129 126 192 168 129 124 Vnet IP Bus 1 Control communication Bus 2 Vnet IP open communication IP Vnet IP Interface Card Figure B3 3 3 2 Network Configuration and Interface Only Vnet IP is Installed Table B3 3 3 1 Network Configurations and Network Connections to be Set Up on Windows
104. Install the ProSafe RS software version R2 03 00 after upgrading the control bus driver of SENG using the CD ROM of ProSafe RS R2 03 59 e Be sure to use the CD ROM of R2 03 59 to install the software immediately after the in stallation of the R2 03 00 software e After the installation of R2 03 59 is complete follow the precautions given in this section and perform the tasks of upgrading the project data TIP R2 03 80 includes the features of all minor release versions of R2 03 SEE ALso For more information about the behaviors of CENTUM that are related to the new features of ProSafe RS R2 03 when ProSafe RS is integrated with CENTUM VP earlier than R4 02 or CS 3000 refer to Appendix 1 Differences in limitations and specifications among software release numbers of CENTUM in Integration with CENTUM VP CS 3000 IM 32Q01E10 31E E Software Revisions Software revision information in release R2 03 is as follows Software Release R2 03 xx 1 e SENG software release number R2 03 xx 1 e SCS system program release number R2 03 xx 1 1 xx varies in accordance with the last two digits of the release number for the software which will be released after R2 03 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program to perform Inter SCS safety communication with an SCS in R2 03 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the syst
105. Network Configuration Vnet IP Ethernet Computer Example in the figures Connected to Vnet IP and Ethernet Computers 1 and 2 Network connection to be set up on Windows Control bus Ethernet and Vnet IP open communications 1 Connected to Ethernet only Com puter 3 Ethernet communications Vnet IP only Connected to Vnet IP Ethernet communication on bus 2 Comput ers 1 to 3 Control bus Ethernet and Vnet IP open communications 2 1 After installing the Vnet IP open communication driver you need to disable the corresponding device 2 You need to disable the Ethernet device SEE ALso For more information about network construction when using Vnet IP open communication refer to Vnet IP Network Construction Guide Legacy Edition Tl 30A10A10 01E Cautions on Using Vnet IP On the computers connected on Vnet IP you need to disable the unused devices according to the network configuration IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 39 When Vnet IP and Ethernet are Installed A IMPORTANT In a system where both Vnet IP and Ethernet are Installed Vnet IP open communications are not used Even in this case you need to install the Vnet IP open communication driver and disable the driver on computers installed with a Vnet IP interface card Ethernet 172 16 1 62 LI oz an Vnet IP Disable V
106. P interface card from the comput er where the control bus driver was installed with the card installed uninstall the driver before you remove the card from the slot When installing the control bus driver restarting the computer is basically not required However restart the computer if a dialog box indicating completion of the installation restarting required is displayed After you install the driver you need to configure network settings Notes on Using SCS Simulator To use the SCS simulator an environment where ProSafe RS is integrated with CENTUM is mandatory You can run the SCS simulator even on a computer where a control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface is not mounted however you must always install the control bus driver on such computers Observe the following precautions when you install the control bus driver on a computer where these cards are not mounted in order to use the SCS simulator TIP Install the control bus driver and then configure Windows network settings If you use the expanded test functions to run SCS simulators on multiple computers in stall the control bus driver in all the computers on which you run the SCS simulator with out mounting a control bus card If mounted you cannot launch the SCS simulator re motely If a control bus card is not mounted when you install the control bus driver a control bus driver of the version for use without a control bus card is installed This
107. Project Set Up the Hardware 1 Set Up Windows 1 Set Up the Network 1 Install ral Configure IT Security Settings Restore Backed Up Data Restore License Project Redistribute Licenses to License assigned Stations 1 eee Create User Accounts 1 Configure Windows Environment Settings for Each User 1 Set Up UPS Service 1 Configure Function Specific Settings 1 Set Up for Connection with Other Systems 1 Finish Reinstallation 1 For the computer dedicated to license management these tasks are not required or may be omitted according to the circumstances Figure C7 2 2 Flow of Reinstallation for the License Management Station A IMPORTANT For the station name of the new computer specify the same name as that set on the previous computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 2 When the Computer Used is Not the Same gt C7 9 SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO For more information about the procedures for a new setup of SENG refer to B3 Setting Up the SENG on page B3 1 B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG on page B4 1 D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA products on page D1 1 For more information about the procedure for a new setup of a computer dedicated to license management refer to B6 Sett
108. S and its serv ice packs have been installed IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 8 B3 2 1 Configuring on Windows 7 Follow these procedures when you use a Windows 7 computer E File System Ensure that the file system is in the NTFS format If it is already formatted in the FAT format reinstall the operating system and reformat partitions into NTFS Partitions not installed with OS should also be formatted into NTFS E System Performance Follow these steps to configure the system performance setting 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Security gt System gt Ad vanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Settings in the Performance section The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Click the Visual Effects tab and select Let Windows choose what s best for my comput er Visual Effects Advanced Data Execution Prevention Select the settings you want to use for the appearance and performance of Windows on this computer Animate controls and elements inside windows Animations in the taskbar and Start Menu Enable Aero Peek Enable desktop composition Enable transparent glass Fade or slide menus into view Fade or slide ToolTips into view Fade out menu items after clicking Save taskbar th
109. S in R1 03 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCSs must be in R1 02 or later E Procedures for Upgrading In order to use the added or modified features in the R1 03 install the R1 03 or later software and open the existing SCS Project ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 E Cautionary Notes on Using New and Modified Features Some steps such as an offline download to SCS may be required before using the new fea tures in the R1 03 after the SENG software is upgraded to R1 03 The steps and cautionary notes for each feature are the followings SEE ALso For more information about detailed procedures after the upgrade refer to Procedure B Master Database Offline Download on page C4 6 Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 Procedure D Setting Definition Items for New Features and Offline Download on page C4 8 Test Function i e SCS Simulator that Runs on a Computer and Interface for Plant Training Before using the Test function i e SCS simulator you need to complete the Procedure C You cannot download the project created for SCS simulation tests to an actual SCS CS 3000 system must be upgraded to R3 08 50 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th
110. Same Variable Multiple writing to the same variable can reduce the program readability and end up down loading of programs that cause unintended behavior Integrity Analyzer in R2 02 detects multi ple writing to the same variable and displays a warning message This warning message is not output with the revisions before R2 02 but it will be displayed after you have upgraded to R2 02 when the program contains any multiple writing to the same variable If this warning message is displayed examine the program to find out if you can eliminate the multiple writing If you find that the multiple writing is necessary acknowledge the results of analysis in Integri ty Analyzer and you can download the program to SCS without change In this case the pro gram can be used as a function allowed for safety application after verifying its validity in user tests Checking for Multiple Calls to the Same FB Instance Multiple calls to the same function block FB instance can lead to an unexpected state in the system and the program may not behave as intended Integrity Analyzer in R2 02 detects multiple calls to the same FB instance and displays a warning message This warning message is not output with the revisions before R2 02 but it will be displayed after you have upgraded to R2 02 when the program contains multiple calls to the same FB instance If this warning message is displayed examine the program to find out if you can eliminate the mult
111. Security Setting e Integration with CENTUM VP e You can fortify computer security To fortify the security select Standard model with the IT Security Tool at installation of both ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP e If you integrate ProSafe RS with CENTUM VP earlier than R5 01 manually relax some security items according to the IT security setting of CENTUM VP e Integration with CS 3000 You cannot fortify computer security Select Legacy model with the IT Security Tool at installation of ProSafe RS Co existence with ProSafe RS on a Computer Observe the following precautions when installing the ProSafe RS and CENTUM software on the same computer e Unless specially instructed install the control bus driver from the ProSafe RS software medium If one of the systems has been upgraded follow the instruction provided for each revi sion e ProSafe RS R3 01 or later and CS 3000 cannot be installed on the same computer e Onacomputer installed with both the ProSafe RS and CENTUM software configure Win dows settings according to the instructions in the installation manual of CENTUM E FAST TOOLS Integration System Coexistence of ProSafe RS and FAST TOOLS on the Same Computer FAST TOOLS and ProSafe RS software cannot run on the same computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A3 2 Software Requirements gt A3 7 Version When using ProSafe RS R3 02 20 the recommended version of FAST TOOLS is R10 01 which is i
112. TUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 9 CENTUM VP System Builder Function and ProSafe RS CENTUM VP CS 3000 Integration Engineering Package By using ProSafe RS CENTUM VP CS 3000 Integration Engineering Package you can build an integrated system of CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS E Building a system by integrating CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table Table D1 1 3 1 Connection information Integration code 0102 0203 03 02 0196 0203 03 02 Product 1 System Builder Function of CENTUM VP R5 03 Project Database of CENTUM VP R5 03 Product 2 CENTUM VP CS 3000 Integration Engineering Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Security model Legacy model Standard model User manage Standalone manage Domain Combination management ment type ment Required proce None Refer to e When the Standard model is applied dures When the Standard model is applied When CENTUM VP project is placed on a computer where SCS Manager is used Add the user account for using SCS Manager of ProSafe RS to the CTM_ENGINEER and PSF_ENGINEER groups For Standalone management perform this setting on the computer where SCS Manager is used For Domain or Combination management perform this setting on the domain controller When CENTUM VP project is placed on a computer where SCS Manager is not used For Standalone
113. VF702 VF701 card follow these steps to install it in the computer 1 Turn off the power of the computer For safety remove the power plug from the outlet 2 Remove the cover of the main unit of the computer 3 Unscrew the screws fixing the slot cover and remove the slot cover IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware gt B3 4 Insert the VF702 VF701 card in the corresponding slot and fix it to the slot Mount the cover back on the computer Write the station address on the label that comes with the VF702 VF701 card and paste it in the front or other easy to see location of the computer E Setting Up the Vnet IP Interface Card You need to install a Vnet IP interface card VI702 VI701 in the computer that is to be con nected on a Vnet IP network VI702 is for PCI Express and VI701 is for PCI Because VI702 and VI701 have the same functionality VI702 is used as an example in the following explanation The Vnet IP interface card has DIP switches for setting the domain number station number and action mode The combination of domain number and station number determines the sta tion address You must set the DIP switches before you configure network settings This section describes how to set the DIP switches DIP switches Domain number Station number
114. When you select the Legacy model you cannot change the user management type from Standalone management e If you select Standalone Management on a Windows domain member computer a warning message is displayed You can go on by clicking OK 4 Ifyou do not need to configure the individual setting items click Next and proceed to step 7 If you want to change the setting of any individual items click Details The Select Setting Items page appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 64 Select Setting Items eal Hides the user name of the last logon user Changing IT environment settings Applying Disables the AutoRun function Changing IT environment settings Disabling Disables NetBIOS over TCP IP Changing IT environment settings Applying t Sets removable storage media to read only devices Changing IT environment settings Disabling Disables USB storage devices Changing IT environment settings Applying t Sets the Software Restriction Policies IEG Sis i i Figure B3 5 2 3 Select Setting Items Page 5 Select or clear the check boxes of the items you want to change TIP It is recommended not to change settings when the Standard model is selected 6 Click Next The Confirm Setting Information page appears Confirm Setti
115. XP File Version Figure C8 2 1 1 Specify Destination 3 Specify the destination folder and enter other required settings The Distinguished Name and File Version are omissible 4 Click Next The Type default account password page appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings gt C8 10 Type default account password Type password Retype password Figure C8 2 1 2 Type Default Account Password 5 Enter the password for use as the initial account password and click Next TIP This password will be used to recover the saved accounts If the saved accounts are not found on the com puter when you recover the accounts new accounts are created All the created accounts will be assigned with a same password If password policy is set and the account password does not meet the password policy an error will occur when recovering an account You will be prompted to change the password when log on this account next time The page for entering the password for use as the encryption key of the saved data ap pears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings gt C8 11 Type password Encryption Key Type password Encryption Key Retype password Encryption Key Figure C8 2 1 3 Type Password Encryption Key 6
116. a user defined FU Background The following specification change was made in R1 01 30 Table Appendix 4 1 1 Specification Change Before If local variable s is used in a user defined FU local variable s is not initialized every time the user defined FU is called After If local variable s is used in a user defined FU local variable s is initialized ev ery time the user defined FU is called The value used for initialization is the initial value defined in Dictionary If initial value is not defined in the Dictionary value will be initialized using the following DINT type 0 REAL type 0 0 BOOL type FALSE TIME type t 0s Notes Local variables in a user defined FU are initialized every time the user defined FU is called If local variables are used in a user defined FU set values to local variables in advance IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 1 Upgrading to R1 01 30 gt App 4 5 Workaround Check if the Instruction Modified message was caused by the specification change and modify the application logic if necessary Cautions on Online Change Downloading after Upgrading SENG After upgrading SENG from R1 01 10 to R1 01 30 or later version the first time online down load will download all POUs to SCS Therefore when running build a warning message for locking all the outputs will be prompted For the later Online Change Download it will download only th
117. about detailed procedures refer to 2 1 Engineering on the SENG side in Integration with CENTUM VP CS 3000 IM 32Q01E10 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 3 Upgrading to R1 02 gt App 4 1 0 Newly Supported I O Modules SAI143 H SAI533 SDV541 In order to use the I O Modules newly supported by the R1 02 you must follow the Proce dure C on SENG in R1 02 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 4 Upgrading to R1 03 gt App 4 1 1 Appendix 4 4 Upgrading to R1 03 n this section the cautionary notes for upgrading from R1 02 to R1 03 will be explained Be fore you upgrade read also the cautionary notes for the previous revisions issued after the software version currently installed on your computer A IMPORTANT In order to use the new features when the ProSafe RS R1 03 is integrated with CS 3000 the release number of the CENTUM CS 3000 software must be R3 08 50 or later E Software Revisions Software revision information in release R1 03 is as follows Software Release R1 03 xx 1 e SENG software release number R1 03 xx 1 SCS system program release number R1 03 xx 1 1 xx varies in accordance with the last two digits of the release number for the software which will be released after R1 03 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program to perform Inter SCS safety communication with an SC
118. ad Write status To open the project with password the password needs to be entered and then open the project in the Read Write status e Itis necessary to use the newer revision SCS Manager at least once to open the library created by older revision SCS Manager e Procedure A must be done for the SCS projects of all the SCSs that communicate with each other by inter SCS safety communication Otherwise an error may occur during build Procedure B Master Database Offline Download For using the new features this procedure may be necessary After upgrading the SENG perform Master Database Offline Download to the SCS Re test ing of SCS application is not required IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 SEE ALSO TIP lt C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Software gt C4 7 The outline of the procedure is as follows 1 Run Procedure A 2 Offline download to the SCS using Master Database Offline Download For more information about the procedure of Master Database Offline Download refer to 9 3 Master Database Offline Download in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download For using the new features this procedure may be necessary After upgrading SENG create a new SCS project and remake the existing SCS project and then offline download the SCS project The procedure is the same as creating a new SCS project And it is roughl
119. adcom NetXtreme 57xx Gigabit Controller Vnet IP Open Communication Driver BUS2 Yokogawa Vnet Adapter a p Other devices Le Ethemet Controller p PA Device D EB Portable Devices b HP Ports COM amp LPT D Processors Figure C9 2 2 3 Adapter Driver Added Properly Control Bus Driver is Successfully Installed but Does Not Start The control bus driver may not start normally due to wrong connection of the bus cables or mistakes in address setting In this case VLNIC errors are recorded in the System log of Event Viewer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 9 e9200 amp Computer Management Local Date and Time 4 System Tools gt Task Scheduler m d p a Event Vi l 2008 02 05 16 30 07 Open Saved Log gt Li Custom Views 2008 02 05 163047 Y Create Custom View a 1 Windows Logs i 2008 02 05 16 30 03 EE Application i 2008 02 05 16 30 19 Import Custom View 2008 02 05 16 30 19 Clear Log 2008 02 05 16 30 19 Y Filter Current Log 2008 02 05 16 28 53 E Properties 2008 02 05 16 28 53 Directory Se b E Applications and Se i 2008 02 05 16 28 52 Time Service Be Find EES Subscriptions i 2008 02 05 16 28 50 USER32 FE Save Events As gt E Shared Folders i 2008 02 05 16 28 46 Time Service View gt g Local Users and Groups i 2008 02 05 16 28 44 Time Service gt Reliability and Performz amp Device Man
120. ager a amp Storage Disk Management Refresh Help Event 5005 VLNIC Event Properties a CEE b Services and Applications Yokogawa Vnet Adapter Has encountered an internal error and has failed a ch Task To This Ev By Copy Log Name System fe Save Selected Events Source VLNIC Logged IQ Refresh Event ID Help Keywords Figure C9 2 2 4 Event Viewer Recording VLNIC Errors System 1 Double click a VLNIC error The Event Properties dialog box appears Select Friendly View Error code General Details Friendly View Binary data In Words 0000 00080000 00380002 0008 00000000 00000000 0010 00000000 00000000 In Bytes 0000 00 00 08 00 02 00 m Figure C9 2 2 5 Event Properties 2 Look up the error code in the following table If the problem is caused by the bus configu ration and or address setting make sure that the settings are correctly made and shut down the computer Then start up the computer again Table C9 2 2 1 Error Codes Generated when Starting the Driver Code 1 Meaning 000101 RAM parity error failure of VF702 VF701 V1702 V1701 card Continues on the next page IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 1 0 Table C9 2 2 1 Error Codes Generated when Starting the Driver Table continued Code 1 Meaning 00010
121. al to safety as the information on compatibility Read this section when you use SCS with a system program before R2 03 ALso For more information about compatibility of software version R2 03 51 and earlier and SCS refer to E Specification Changes Made in SCS System Program Release Number R2 03 51 on page App 4 31 E Inter SCS Safety Communication The Inter SCS Communication Lock Window is not available For testing of inter SCS safety communication and maintenance internal variables should be connected to the OUT of consumer inter SCS safety communication FBs and the application should read the values of these internal variables During testing and maintenance you need to lock the connected variables as necessary E Online Changeable Information The online changeable information in SCS with a system program before R2 03 is as follows Table Appendix 4 7 2 1 POU Information POU Information that is Changeable Online Modification Online Change 1 Changing user defined Function names 4 Yes Changeable by online change download No Offline download is required Program User Defined FB User Defined FU Adding deleting variables Yes Yes 2 Yes 3 Adding a variable to be named the same No No No as that of a deleted variable Changing attributes of variables No No No Adding deleting I O variables Yes Adding deleting FU Yes Yes Yes Adding deleting use
122. ar use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the ProSafe RS software medium The installation menu appears 3 Click Install License Manager Software The Welcome dialog box appears If modules required to run ProSafe RS such as Microsoft NET Framework are not already installed a dialog box appears prompting you to install such modules Click Install Restarting the computer may be required after installing the modules If required restart the computer and then continue the ProSafe RS installation For Windows Server 2008 R2 Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 is included in the OS but displayed when it is disabled If displayed interrupt the installation and enable this module The installation fails otherwise A message that prompts restarting the computer may be displayed so as to grant the currently logged on user the rights required to perform the subsequent installation tasks If prompted restart the computer and log on using the same user account to continue the installation of the license management software 4 Click Next The User Information dialog box appears If a different version of control bus driver is already installed a dialog box appears prompting you to update the driver However you do not need to install the control bus driver on a computer dedicated to license man agement Click OK to close the dialog box 5 In the User Information dialog box enter the name and
123. ates fragmented files on your computer s hard disk to improve system performance How d isk Defragment lp Modify schedule PM ast rum 3 31 2008 8 32 Next scheduled run Never Scheduled defragmentation is enabled aaa Your disks will be defragmented at the scheduled time Defragmentnow Figure B3 2 2 8 Disk Defragmenter Dialog Box IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 21 B3 2 3 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 R2 Follow these procedures when you use a Windows 2008 R2 computer E File System Ensure that the file system is in the NTFS format If it is already formatted in the FAT format reinstall the operating system and reformat partitions into NTFS Partitions not installed with OS should also be formatted into NTFS E System Performance Follow these steps to configure the system performance setting 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Security gt System gt Ad vanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Settings in the Performance section The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Select the Visual Effects tab and select Adjust for best performance Select the settings you want to use for the appearance and performance of Windows on this computer Let Windows choose what s best for m
124. ation management refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Standalone management refer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 Users who use OPC client services The following table shows the users who use OPC client services IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 6 Table D1 1 2 2 Users who use OPC client services OPC client service User Report Package LHS6530 User who logged on to Windows Access Administrator Package FDA 21 CFR Part 11 User who logged on to Windows compliant LHS5170 OPC client other than CENTUM VP product 1 Users who use OPC client services 1 Functions created using CENTUM Data Access Library LHS2412 are also included E When the computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 uses OPC client services The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table Table D1 1 2 3 Connection information Integration code 0101 0202 01 01 Product 1 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function of CENTUM VP R5 03 Product 2 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Security model Legacy model Standard model User manage Standalone management Domain
125. can collaborate with ProSafe RS and software that can co exist on the same computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A3 1 Hardware Requirements gt A3 2 A3 1 Hardware Requirements This section describes the hardware requirements for SENG and the file server that are used in a ProSafe RS system E Hardware Requirements for SENG You must ensure that the computer that is used as SENG meets the hardware requirements as shown in the following table If CENTUM software is also installed on the same computer the computer must also meet the requirements for CENTUM Table A3 1 1 Hardware Requirements for SENG Component Os Windows Server Windows Server Windows 7 Windows Vista 2008 R2 2008 Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 2 13 GHz Intel Xeon Dual Intel Core 2 Duo or higher Core 2 93 GHz or Processor 2 13 e Intel Xeon Dual Core 2 0 GHz or high higher GHz or higher er e Intel Xeon Dual Core 2 0 GHz or higher Main memory 4 GB or more 2 GB or more 4 GB or more 2 GB or more Hard disk space e 20 GB or more free space mandatory e 40 GB or more free space recommended However if you store an operation history database 100 GB or more is recommen ded SXGA 1280 x 1024 or higher resolution True color mandatory WXGA 1440x900 or higher resolution for wide monitoring Display Graphics DirectX 9 graphic processing unit or equivalent and supports the fol
126. cense Manageme nt Stat OM iiss cicsscccccnccciveticceds ssasecteceseccecccesvetsscasssececereesseraeesvexseze B5 9 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management sec E ce ea ate ec eee een eee B6 1 Configuring the Hardware of SCS and Devices for Connection between DOMAINS oicecsincscascavansisnnctesneteesscanceacnadiadesvacmentaveadiensdinracsencaeih B7 1 Installing the Functions that Operate with CENTUM VP e ree IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TocC 1 Installation IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition CONTENTS PART C Maint nanCe sivcciccoccccctsstecsecseecencomsgudeaceupaneunsnens C 1 C1 Adding Licenses and Changing License Assignments C1 1 C1 1 Adding a LIGCNSCe wiei ice iiccited ccctesevsteccedenes dceceswcedsannecneacieaes covecaneesnavaceaeecneie see C1 2 C1 2 Changing License ASSIQNMENMS cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeneaneeeeeeees C1 3 C2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment Latev C2 1 C3 Backing Up the System ssssssnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna C3 1 C4 Upgrading the ProSafe RS Software ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C4 1 C4 1 Installation for UPQradinng ceeeccsesseenceeseseeeesneneeeeeseeseeseeeenseeeneeeeneeeeenees C4 2 C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Softwar e cccecccssseeeeeeeeeeees C4 5 C4 3 Upgrading the Computer Dedicated to License Management C4 10
127. changed Descriptions of updating to R3 02 20 have been added Descriptions of connection with other products and the integration code have been changed 2013 3rd Edition R3 02 10 or later Introduction Description of station types has been changed A3 B1 B3 2 B3 8 C4 2 C5 D Version numbers of the software products that can coexist have been changed Descriptions of connection with other products have been added Descriptions for different OSs have been arranged into separate subsections for each OS Descriptions of the procedures after updating the software have been changed Descriptions of updating to R3 02 10 have been added Descriptions of connection with other products have been entirely revised Dec 2013 2nd Edition R3 02 or later The entire manual has been revised Aug 2011 1st Edition R3 01 or later Newly published IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 Rev 2 eee For Questions and More Information Online Query A query form is available on the following URL for online query http www yokogawa com iss E Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation m Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 9 32 Nakacho Musashino shi Tokyo 180 8750 JAPAN SSS ER IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00
128. ckage 2 Make the created program user belong to the PSF_OPC_LCL user group oe For more information about the settings for a computer where the SOE OPC Interface Package and CENTUM VP ExaOPC Interface Package coexist refer to D1 1 2 CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package on page D1 5 For more information about the settings for using Exaquantum as an OPC client refer to D1 3 1 ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package and Exaquantum PIMS Server on page D1 17 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 5 Setup when Using the Access Control and Operation History Management Package gt B4 6 B4 5 Setup when Using the Access Control and Operation History Management Package In ProSafe RS R3 01 and later it is possible to manage operation histories on SENG by using the CHS5170 Access Control and Operation History Management Package This section ex plains the operations required to use this package EE E ALso For more information about the precautions to be followed when setting the access control operation history management function refer to e 2 13 Access Control Operation History Management Functions in Engineering Guide IM 32Q01C10 31E e 16 Access Control Operation History Management Function in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E E Windows User Groups to which Administrators and Engineers Belong
129. collaboration IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 D1 2 1 lt D1 2 ProSafe RS and PRM gt D1 14 SOE OPC Interface Package and PRM Server Connecting ProSafe RS and the PRM Server enables PRM to retrieve messages from Pro Safe RS To perform OPC communication with PRM the SOE OPC Interface Package CHS2200 is required No setting is required on the PRM Server TIP PRM server and ProSafe RS cannot be installed on the same computer E Enabling PRM to retrieve messages from ProSafe RS The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table Table D1 2 1 1 Connection information Integration code 0202 0302 02 02 Product 1 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Product 2 Plant Resource Manager Server of PRM R3 10 or later Security model Legacy model Standard model User manage Standalone management Domain Combination manage ment type ment Required proce Refer to e When the Refer to e Setting the logon type with Standard model e dures Legacy model is ap Granting remote access permission with Standard model e plied Creating PRM related internal user accounts with Standard model When the Legacy model is applied 1 2 Log on by using a user account with administrative rights From the Start menu select All Programs gt YOKOGAWA ProSafe gt SOE
130. company name select the instal lation folder and confirm the language for installation and click Next The Confirm Settings dialog box appears Review the installation settings and click Install A dialog box showing the installation progress appears and when the license manage ment software installation is compete the Installation Complete dialog box appears Select Yes want to set up IT security now and click Finish IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management gt B6 2 The IT Security Tool starts 8 Goon to configure the security settings TIP When deleting the ProSafe RS function and installing only the license management software after installing ProSafe RS first log on using an administrative user account and uninstall ProSafe RS and then install the license management software Ay IMPORTANT If you want to manage other product s licenses on the computer dedicated to license manage ment you also need to install the license management software from the software medium of that product SPE For more information about how to uninstall the ProSafe RS software refer to C6 1 1 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software on page C6 3 For more information about configuring the IT security settings refer to B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tool on page B3 62 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B7 Configuring
131. computer Click Yes to restart the computer After the computer is restarted re configure the settings on the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties windows for all the network interface cards IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software gt B3 54 B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software This section describes how to install the ProSafe RS software E Administrative User who Performs New Installation When installing the ProSafe RS software for the first time on a computer the installation must be performed by an administrative user who belongs to the group shown in the following ta ble The user who has installed the software is automatically added to the PSF_MAINTENANCE group Table B3 4 1 Groups to Which the User Who Performs New Installation Belongs Security model and user management type to be applied Standard model Legacy model Domain Combination manage Standalone management im t Administrators of the local comput Administrators of the local comput er er Domain Admins of the domain 1 4 Install while the computer is connected to the domain E Installation Procedure Follow these steps to install the ProSafe RS software 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 Terminate all running applications including resident programs such as anti virus soft ware 3 Insert the ProSafe RS software medium into the drive e If the Au
132. ction you need to perform Procedure D on an SENG of R3 02 20 or later DNP3 Slave Function To start communications from a DNP3 master by using the DNP3 slave function you need to perform Procedure C on an SENG of R3 02 20 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C6 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software gt C6 1 C6 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software This section describes how to uninstall the ProSafe RS software and network drivers Proce dures are provided for the following two cases e Uninstallation on SENG e Uninstallation on the computer dedicated to license management Note however that uninstalling the ProSafe RS software does not remove the project data base user settings registries and so on If you need to remove ProSafe RS software com pletely reinstall your operating system IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG gt C6 2 C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG This section describes the procedures for uninstallation on SENG IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG gt C6 3 C6 1 1 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software If you uninstall the ProSafe RS software the license management software is also uninstal led However the license management data IT Security Tool and project data will not be de leted TIP The IT Security Tool is also used by YOKOGAWA products other than ProSafe RS Therefore even
133. d Accepting Licenses on page B3 67 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Software gt C4 5 C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Software This section explains the tasks to be performed after upgrading the SENG software Because the SCS databases and SCS system programs that SENG manages are basically upward compatible there is no need to modify the engineering data created with earlier ver sion software However in order to use the new features supported by the newer SCS system program re creation of the SCS project or offline downloading of database to SCS may be required after upgrading the SENG A IMPORTANT e The SENGs in the same RS project should have the software of the same release num ber e Once opening an existing SCS project or creating a new SCS project using newer revi sion software in SENG the SCS project cannot be opened using older revision software e The SCS system program release number of SCSs in a system should basically be the same but mixture of different release numbers is allowed However the SCSs communi cating with each other using the Inter SCS safety communication function must have ap propriate release numbers to be compatible TIP If Adobe Acrobat is not installed on the computer it is recommended to upgrade the software for viewing the online manual to the Adobe Reader version recommended in this manual RET For mor
134. d launch the Active Directory Domain Services Installation Wiz ard dcpromo exe Active Directory Domain Services Installation Wizard appears If you are using Windows Server 2008 R2 NET Framework 3 5 1 is enabled in addition to Active Directory Domain Services 10 11 12 13 Click Next The information regarding Operating System Compatibility is displayed Confirm the information and then click Next The Choose a Deployment Configuration page appears Select Create a new domain in a new forest and then click Next The Name the Forest Root Domain page appears In the FQDN of the forest root domain text box type the predetermined domain name in the format Domain name local and then click Next The Set Forest Functional Level page appears In the Forest functional level drop down list select Windows Server 2003 and then click Next The Set Domain Functional Level page appears In the Domain functional level drop down list box select Windows Server 2008 and then click Next The Additional Domain Controller Options page appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 2 Configuring the Domain Controller Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 gt B2 4 14 15 16 17 18 19 Confirm that the DNS server check box is selected and click Next The Location for Database Log Files and SYSVOL page appears Specify the locations of the database folder
135. database and check in destination folder of Version Control Tool Share name RS Share Ay IMPORTANT If the shared name does not match the name above the IT Security Tool is not able to rein force the folder security Be sure to set the share name above using the following procedure so that you can reinforce security Creating a New Folder Start Windows Explorer and create a folder in which the project folders are to be placed On the Sharing tab in the properties of the folder that is created click Advanced Shar ing Select Share this folder and set RS Projects or RS Share as the share name Click Permissions and grant full control to Everyone in the Share Permissions section This access permission setting will be changed when you run the IT Security Tool IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server gt B5 4 When a Shared Folder is Already Created on the File Server Before configuring IT security settings add a share name RS Projects or RS Share to the folder The folder will be included in the process of IT security setting configuration and ac cess permissions setting will be applied Share names that were previously set up do not need to be deleted A IMPORTANT If a folder with the share name RS Projects or RS Share has already been created for an other purpose on an existing file server change the existing share name
136. del page appears TIP If you have not saved the initial security setting data click Cancel to go back to the main menu and save the current security settings Select Security Model Setting Model Description of Setting File Setting tem Description Figure B2 3 5 Select Security Model 3 From the Setting Model drop down list select Domain Controller Standard Model Do main Combination Management 4 Click Next The Confirm Setting Information page appears TIP If you click Details the Select Setting Items page appears 5 For the rest of steps perform the same operations as when the IT Security Tool is run immediately after installing the ProSafe RS software SEE ALso For more information about the IT security setting operations that are performed following the ProSafe RS software installation refer to B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tool on page B3 62 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 4 Creating Domain Users gt B2 9 B2 4 Creating Domain Users This section explains how to create domain users and add them to the domain groups A IMPORTANT When you change the rights of domain users the changes may not be applied immediately If this happens log on and log off twice on each computer after you have changed users rights Do the same thing when you have deleted rights from domain users E Creating a Domain User
137. dentical with R9 05 SP2 If the version is earlier than R10 01 ProSafe RS functions are restricted as follows e The new station type SSC57 is not supported e The Narrowband mode of Vnet IP Upstream is not supported e The function to set gas flow rate calculation related parameters is not available e The function to read buffered data from SCS is not available e IOM models supported from ProSafe RS R3 02 00 are not displayed In addition the following restrictions apply if the revision of FAST TOOLS is earlier than R9 03 e The number of I O nodes in SCS displayed on FAST TOOLS is up to 9 e The number of inter SCS safety communication locks is not displayed in the SCS Status Display window of FAST TOOLS E Use of PRM Coexistence of ProSafe RS and PRM on the Same Computer Whether or not the PRM and ProSafe RS software can run on the same computer is as fol lows e APRM server and ProSafe RS software cannot run on the same computer e A PRM client and ProSafe RS software can run on the same computer Note however that a PRM client cannot run on the same computer if the computer has a license of SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS e Ifyou install the PRM client on SENG that is connected to the narrowband Vnet IP Up stream network you need additional Ethernet wiring for PRM client communications Version When using ProSafe RS R3 02 10 or later the recommended version of PRM is R3 12 or lat er Because the
138. domain controller E Items to be Prepared e Computer for the domain controller e ProSafe RS software medium Model CHSKM30 This is required for IT security configuration IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 2 Configuring the Domain Controller Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 gt B2 3 B2 2 Configuring the Domain Controller Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 This section describes the procedure for configuring the domain controller on Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 E Setup Procedure TIP TIP 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Administrative Tools and then select Server Manager The Server Manager appears Open Server Manager gt Roles and then select Add Roles The Add Roles wizard appears Click Next The Select Server Roles page appears For Server Roles select the Active Directory Domain Services check box and then click Next An overview of the selected settings is displayed If you are using Windows Server 2008 R2 a dialog box for adding features appears before an overview of the selected settings is displayed Click Add Required Features An overview of the selected settings is dis played Review the content and click Next The Confirm Installation Selections page appears Click Install The installation starts and the results of installation is displayed when completed Click Close this wizard an
139. driver is used when the SCS simulator is run without mounting a control bus card To reuse or divert a computer installed with a without a control bus card version of control bus driver for use in actual plant operation uninstall the control bus driver mount a control bus card and then install the control bus driver again The control bus driver should be installed according to the procedure for installing the control bus driver For the IP address for the control bus driver on each computer set the address of control bus domain number dd station number ss Example 172 16 dd ss Note that dd ss must not overlap with the addresses of the other stations In particular it must not overlap with the domain number station number used for SCS and FCS IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 34 E Installation Procedure TIP TIP Log on as an administrative user Insert the ProSafe RS software medium into the drive e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the ProSafe RS software medium The installation menu appears On the installation menu click Control Bus Driver A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the setup Select INSTALL and click OK A dialog box appears confirming to execute the installation C
140. dure for setting the display properties is explained as follows 1 Log on using the user account for which to set display properties 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Personalization gt Desktop Background The Desktop Background window appears apap 7 GO gt Control Panel Personalization Desktop Background 4 Search D Choose a desktop background Click a picture to make it your desktop background To use a picture that s not listed browse to the picture and double click it Location Solid Colors Browse F More Figure B3 8 2 1 Desktop Background Window 3 Set Solid Colors for Location select a color of your choice and then click OK TIP When the background color is defined as a solid color or another color after the first logon the background color may revert to black at the second logon If this problem occurs you need to define the background color again with the same procedure 4 Select Screen Saver The Screen Saver Settings dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 77 E Screen Saver Settings x Screen Saver Screen saver None fal senose _ Preview Wait 10 minutes 7 On resume display logon screen Power management Conserve energy or maximize performance by adj
141. e License management station All license assigned stations Continues on the next page IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 66 Table B3 5 2 1 LMHOSTS File Settings Table continued Station type Stations to be set in the LMHOSTS file e License management station e Computer that holds project files File server computer if integrated with CENTUM computer that holds CENTUM project database License assigned station e Domain management Combination management In the DNS server set the license management station and all the license assigned sta tions IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 6 Distributing and Accepting Licenses gt B3 67 B3 6 Distributing and Accepting Licenses Licenses are the rights to use ProSafe RS software packages To make the installed software packages available for use you need to distribute the licenses from the license management station to license assigned stations and accept the licenses on each license assigned station This process of making software packages available for use is called activation of software packages In a ProSafe RS system there is always one license management station and other stations are license assigned stations The license management station can be set up on a computer where SENG runs SEE ALso For more information about the procedure for distributing and activating licenses
142. e Directory Users and Computers window appears In the left pane right click the Users folder and then select New gt Group The New Object Group dialog box appears 2 Computers E Oonan Controfers E T ForesgrSeasityPrinapals Delegate Control zii Figure B2 3 1 Active Directory Users and Computers 5 Enter PSF MAINTENANCE in the Group name box select the Group scope and Group type options and then click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller gt B2 6 Figure B2 3 2 New Object Group 6 Check the right pane to confirm that the PSF_MAINTENANCE group has been created in Users Figure B2 3 3 Activate Directory Users and Computers after creating a new group 7 Add the logged on user to the PSF_MAINTENANCE and Domain Admins groups es For more information about how to enable NET Framework 3 5 1 and 3 0 refer to mg Enabling NET Framework 3 5 1 on page B3 25 For more information about how to add uses to user groups refer to E Adding Domain Users to Domain Groups on page B2 10 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller gt B2 7 E Saving the Initial IT Security Settings A IMPORTANT When you use the IT Security Tool to configure IT security settings for the first time after the Windows domain
143. e SCS system program release number R1 01 30 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release numbers of the SCS system programs on SCSs communicating with each other using the Inter SCS safety communication function must be the same E Procedures for Upgrading A For upgrading from R1 01 30 to a newer version the ProSafe RS software needs to be instal led into SENG However no specific operation is needed for applying the revised and added features after the installation The SCS project and library created or edited in R1 01 30 will be unconditionally converted to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 when they are first time opened after upgrading to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 There will be no confirmation dialog box prompts for the conversion IMPORTANT When upgrading from a release older than R1 01 30 to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 the cautionary notes for upgrading an earlier release to R1 01 30 should be referenced It is necessary to read all the cautionary notes and then perform the required operations accordingly E Note on Upgrading to R1 01 50 If a user defined FB satisfying the following condition is created by an SENG in an earlier ver sion than R1 01 50 and if the SENG is upgraded to R1 01 50 or later and a Build is performed without modification of the project data there are cases where an offline download is re quired Condition With POU program or user defined FU FB created by FBD if the output of an FU FB is loo ped back to its own input pa
144. e a repair disk refer to Windows related manual or the web site of Microsoft Corporation E Backing Up Projects You can copy the ProSafe RS folders to a backup medium using Windows Explorer It is also possible to use commercially available backup software to back up the folders The SCS project folders should be backed up using Version Control Tool E ALso For more information about the explanation of Version Control Tool refer to 13 Version Control in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 Upgrading the ProSafe RS Software gt C4 1 C4 Upgrading the ProSafe RS Software This section explains the procedure to follow when upgrading the ProSafe RS software and tasks to be performed after upgrading IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 1 Installation for Upgrading gt C4 2 C4 1 Installation for Upgrading This section explains the procedure to upgrade the ProSafe RS software already installed on a computer to a newer version or revision TIP Upgrading the software where the number next to R is incremented by 1 or more for example from R2 03 to R3 01 denotes version up while the number next to R does not change for example from R2 02 to R2 03 denotes revision up E Items to be Prepared Prepare the following items so that they are at hand before upgrading the ProSafe RS soft ware e ProSafe RS software medium
145. e computer by using the TI Security Tool A IMPORTANT e The security model and user management type of IT security settings must be consistent in the entire system If you change the security model or user management type make the changes on all computers including file server computers e Ifyou have changed any security settings from their default values always save the se curity settings by using the Save function of the IT Security Tool to enable security set tings to be restored at computer failure e After you have activated the license of the SOE OPC Interface package CHS2200 be sure to run the IT Security Tool from the start menu IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 59 B3 5 1 IT Security Tool The IT Security Tool is the security configuration tool that was developed for Yokogawa sys tem products You need to use this tool to provide security measures on the computers instal led with ProSafe RS The IT Security Tool applies security settings on a computer automatically based on the se lected security model and the user management type The functions of the IT Security Tool are shown in the following table Table B3 5 1 1 Functions of the IT Security Tool Function Description Setup Applies the Legacy model or Standard model of security settings S ve Saves the security settings of the OS The security settings are encrypted with a specified pass
146. e information about release numbers of the SENG software and SCS system program in each soft ware release and compatibility in inter SCS safety communication between different revisions refer to C5 Upgrading to R3 02 20 on page C5 1 Appendix 4 Compatibility between Revisions and Cautionary Notes for Upgrading on page App 4 1 For more information about Adobe Reader settings refer to B4 1 Online Manual Setting on page B4 2 E Checking Inconsistency in TCP IP Settings After updating the software on the SENG run the TCP IP Inconsistency Detection Tool If any inconsistencies are found in the setting make TCP IP settings again after executing the tool for repairing inconsistency in TCP IP setting F For more information about the TCP IP Inconsistency Detect Tool and TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool re fer to m Procedure 6 Repair TCP IP Settings on page B3 52 E Settings after Upgrading Software After upgrading the ProSafe RS software the following procedures need to be performed What procedure needs to be performed depends on what new features to be used User needs to run the following procedures in accordance with each guideline of the revision up grade procedure IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 SEE ALSO lt C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Software gt C4 6 e Procedure A Opening SCS Projects e Procedure B Master Database Offline Download e Procedure
147. e modified POU to SCS It is recommended to run offline download or online change download right after the upgrad ing Thus the Online Change Download for the later modifications can download only the modified POU to SCS Follow the procedures below to perform either offline downloading or online change download right after upgrading Offline Download 1 Choose Clean Project Library from Project menu 2 Start Build 3 Run offline downloading Online Change Download 1 Choose Edit Project Description from Tools menu and then click OK on the displayed Project description dialog box 2 Save the project Start Build a warning message for locking all the outputs will be prompted Run Online Change Download IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 2 Upgrading to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 gt App 4 6 Appendix 4 2 Upgrading to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 In this section the cautionary notes for upgrading to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 will be explained Moreover for upgrading from a release older than R1 01 30 to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 it is neces sary to read the cautionary notes for upgrading to R1 01 30 together with this section Software Revisions Software revision information in release R1 01 40 is as follows e SENG software release number R1 01 40 e SCS system program release number R1 01 30 Software revision information in release R1 01 50 is as follows e SENG software release number R1 01 50
148. earlier than R3 12 of versions of PRM cannot connect to the narrowband mode Because PRM R3 01 does not support IT security function be sure to use ProSafe RS with the Legacy model of IT security settings PRM R3 04 or earlier version does not support the SCSP2 station E Use of Exaopc Coexistence of ProSafe RS and Exaopc on the Same Computer Exaopc and ProSafe RS software cannot run on the same computer Version ProSafe RS can be connected to Exaopc R3 21 00 or later When using ProSafe RS R3 02 20 or later the recommended version of Exaopc is R3 72 00 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A3 2 Software Requirements gt A3 8 E Use of Exaquantum Coexistence of ProSafe RS and Exaquantum on the Same Computer Exaquantum and ProSafe RS software cannot run on the same computer Version ProSafe RS R3 01 or later can be connected to Exaquantum R2 20 or later When using ProSafe RS R3 02 20 or later the recommended version of Exaquantum is R2 60 or later Because the version of Exaquantum that is earlier than R2 60 does not support IT security function you must select Legacy model for ProSafe RS IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B New Setup gt B 1 B New Setup This section explains the procedures for setting up stations IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B1 lt B1 Preparing for the Setup gt B1 1 Preparing for the Setup This section explains
149. ears Select Enabled and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 13 FE Turn off Windows Defender Not Configured Comment Supported or At least Windows Vista Help Tums off Windows Defender Real Time Protection and no more scons are scheduled you enable this policy setting Windows Defender does not run and computers will not be scanned for spyware or other potentially unwanted software you disable or do not configure this policy setting by default Windows Defender runs and computers are scanned for spyware and other potentially unwanted software Figure B3 2 1 7 Turn Off Windows Defender Dialog Box Disk Defragmenter Disk Defragmenter Tool can be used to reorganize the fragmented files on computer hard disk so as to improve the computer performance With the default setting of Windows 7 the Disk Defragmenter Tool is scheduled to start periodically at 1 00 on Wednesday Because the per formance of ProSafe RS may be affected significantly it is recommended to disable the peri odic disk defragmentation Moreover you may manually start the disk defragmenter when you feel the disk performance is getting worse or when you perform system maintenance 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Disk De fragmenter The Disk Defragmenter windo
150. ease R3 02 10 1 e SENG software release number R3 02 10 1 e SCS system program release number R3 02 10 1 1 The last two digits of the release number will be changed in accordance with the software revisions after the release of R3 02 10 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program of an SCS that performs Inter SCS safety communication with SCS with system program version R3 02 10 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCSs must be of R1 02 or later Control Bus Driver The control bus drivers installed on the computer should be upgraded to the version supplied in R3 02 10 In particular the control bus driver must be upgraded when ProSafe RS is inte grated with FAST TOOLS and used in the Narrowband mode of Vnet IP Upstream E Basic Procedure for Upgrading In order to use the features added or modified install the ProSafe RS software R3 02 10 or later and open the existing SCS project For the features that require further procedures the procedures are described in the following section IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 10 Upgrading to R3 02 10 gt App 4 40 Appendix 4 10 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading E Procedure for Using New and Modified Features After the SENG software has been upgraded to R3 02 10 some of the features added or modified in R3 02 10 require furthe
151. ed restart the computer and install the driver again Vnet IP Open Communication Driver 1 Start the installation menu again and click Vnet IP Open Communication Driver 2 Perform either of the following operations e Ifthe driver can be deleted delete it and restart the computer Then install the driver again e Ifthe driver cannot be deleted restart the computer and install the driver again E Error Message is Displayed during Network Driver Installation 3 Previously functioning Ethernet communications may fail generating an error message Cause e Hardware such as the Ethernet adapter card and Ethernet cable is not connected prop erly e The network binding is not correctly set e The TCP IP communication settings are not correct IP address subnet mask etc Remedy e Check the hardware Ethernet adapter card and the Ethernet cable e In Control Panel check the Network and Dial up Connections settings IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 1 2 E Restarted the Computer After Deleting the Driver without Removing the Control Bus Interface Card or Vnet IP Open Interface Card from the Computer The actions you should take are described for the control bus driver and for the Vnet IP open communication driver Control Bus Driver If you restart the computer after deleting the control bus driver without removing the control bus inter
152. edure 1 Add the second domain controller computer to the existing domain 2 Configure IT security settings SEE ALso For more information about configuring the IT security settings refer to B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller on page B2 5 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment gt B2 19 B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment When using ProSafe RS in a Windows domain environment the time on computers used in the ProSafe RS system and the time on the domain controller must be synchronized Because the time synchronization service of a ProSafe RS system uses the time on the con trol bus as the time master the time of the domain controller should be synchronized to the time of client computers if the system is used in a domain environment This section describes how to set up time synchronization in a system that consists of only ProSafe RS E Cautionary Note on Time Synchronization A computer installed with the ProSafe RS software is automatically configured so as not to use the domain controller as the time master for time synchronization even if the computer is added to the Windows domain IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment gt B2 20 B2 7 1 Implementing Time Synchronization in a System Consisting of O
153. ee if there are any FBs containing a CASE statement in which a minus value is specified for a label e If any FBs using a minus value for a label of CASE statement are found make sure that the change in behavior does not cause any adverse effects on the system 3 4 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 gt App 4 1 9 e If FBs using a minus value for a label of CASE statement are not found all the FBs us ing CASE statements will be downloaded but the system behavior remains the same so you do not need to perform tests again 1 If you specify a minus value for a label in a CASE statement in ST an incorrect database which causes unexpected behavior may be generated In the following example if variable1 is neither 1 nor 2 3 is always assigned to aaa CASE variable1 OF 1 aaa 1 2 aaa 2 1 aaa 3 When the variable is neither 1 nor 2 this line is always executed 2 aaa 4 ELSE aaa 5 END_CASE In this case Cross Reference Analyzer does not detect the difference of the FBs using CASE statements In this case Cross Reference Analyzer does not detect the difference of the FBs using a minus value for a label of CASE statement 4 To find the locations where CASE statements are used open multiple STs in Multi Language Editor and search for CASE eo E Enhanced Checking by Integrity Analyzer Checking for Multiple Writing to the
154. een SCSs in the same domain SCSs synchronized with GPS time SCSPs synchronized with a Vnet IP network time An SCSP synchronized with SNTP server and an SCSV synchronized with GPS time DLYT scan period of the producer scan period of the consumer Additional Delay Additional Delay V net Delay No BCV CGW used 300 ms Via BCV CGW the number of BCV used x 1 3 s the number of pairs of CGWs used x 2 3 s Vnet IP Delay Within a Vnet IP domain 300 ms Between Vnet IP domains No wide area network 300 ms Regardless of the number of L8SWes Between Vnet IP domains Wide area network 1 3 s Regardless of the number of L8SWes Vnet IP V net V net delay Vnet IP delay V net router delay 1 3 s V net 1 Vnet IP V net 2 V net 1 delay Vnet IP delay V net 2 delay Two V net routers delay 2 6 s Set 3 seconds to DLYT when the calculated DLYT is shorter than 3 seconds 2 In case of Inter SCS safety communications between SCSs synchronized with V net time in SCS in different domains DLYT the number of BCV used x 5 s 3 If there are V net routers between SCSs synchronized with V net time in the Inter SCS safety communications DLYT BCV number of V net router layers x 5s IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 34 A IMPORTANT If you set 0 seconds to DLYT and bypass inter FB transmission check it is not possible to use rece
155. eesccceeseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseenseeeeeeeaes C8 13 C8 3 1 Procedure for SENG PC 2 0 co cccceecceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenaeens C8 14 C8 3 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller C8 16 C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File PaSSWOM c eeccsseseereeneeeeeerens C8 17 C8 4 1 Procedures for SENG PC oons aa eiaa aiai C8 18 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 C8 4 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller C8 20 C9 eso tl a e le 1 Eaeene semen oneness eer ee tee a ene Sener emer aeania C9 1 C9 1 Windows Related Troubleshooting cccccceseserceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeesseeseeeeeeeee C9 2 C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network ccccessseccessseeneeesseenceenseeeeeeenees C9 3 C9 2 1 Precaution on Network Cable Connection 2 0 eecereeeeees C9 4 C9 2 2 Problems Related to Installation and Deletion of Drivers C9 5 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TocD 1 Installation IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition CONTENTS PART D Connection with Other Products D 1 D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA produ ts cseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D1 1 D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS 0 cccceeceeceeccecceeceeceeceesceeceecceseecenseesensenees D1 3 D1 1 1 CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and ProSafe RS Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function PACK AGC a A OORA D1 4 D
156. ehavior at abnormal calculation you need to perform Procedure F on an SENG of R2 03 or later Use the SCS Constants Builder and specify the behavior of the SCS at abnormal calculation However if you also want to use the new sys tem FB of SYS_CERR computation error indicator you need to perform Procedure C A IMPORTANT If you want to specify the behavior of the SCS at abnormal calculation in a system that does not include SCS Maintenance Support Tool on SENG or CENTUM HIS you must perform Procedure C on an SENG of R2 03 or later This is because in such a system you need to use the SYS_CERR FB computation error indicator to detect that the SCS is running even after abnormal calculation has occurred Improvement in SCS Software Performance To improve the software performance of SCSP1 or SCSV you need to perform Procedure B on an SENG of R2 03 or later Cautionary Note on Offline Download after Upgrading to R2 03 59 If you try to offline download an existing project immediately after upgrading the ProSafe RS software to R2 03 an error occurs You need to run Clean Project and Build before offline downloading the project IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 26 Appendix 4 7 2 SEE Compatibility with Earlier Revisions This section describes the specifications and cautionary notes of SCS with a system program before R2 03 that are critic
157. el Domain Combina tion type Legacy model Administrators and PSF_MAINTE Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE NANCE_LCL of the local computer 1 NANCE of the domain 1 1 Log on to the computer while it is connected to the domain 2 While changing the user name and password of the domain administrator are required E Changing Procedure 1 Log on to the computer as the user who changes the security settings 2 From the Start menu click YYOKOGAWA Security gt IT Security Tool The IT Security Tool starts Click Setup Select the security model and user management type you want to change to The rest of the procedure is the same as that for the normal setups nee For more information about running the IT Security Tool refer to B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tool on page B3 62 E Changing the Security Model when CENTUM VP R4 01 to R4 03 is Coexisting on the Computer If CENTUM VP of a version from R4 01 to R4 03 is coexisting on the computer the security model should be changed by a user who belongs to both the PSF_MAINTENANCE and CTM_MAINTENANCE groups In this case change the security model for CENTUM VP first and then change the security model for ProSafe RS IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 C8 5 lt C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings gt C8 1 2 Procedures for a File Server or Domain Controller This section describes the procedures for changing
158. elect Properties In the Properties dialog box of My Computer click the COM Security tab and then click Edit Limits in the Access Permission section Grant the remote access permission to ANONYMOUS LOGON and click OK Creating PRM related internal user accounts with Standard model 1 2 Log on to the SENG as a user with administrative rights To run the PRM internal account creation tool double click the following file in the PRM software medium DVD drive PRM SecuritySettingUtility CreateInternalUserAccount exe Two user accounts PRM_PROCESS and PRM_PROCESS2 are created Confirm that the created users are members of the following user group PSF_OPC when Standalone management is applied PSF_OPC_LCL when Domain management is applied PSF_OPC or PSF_OPC_LCL when Combination management is applied E Collaborating with a PRM Server of R3 03 to R3 05 To enable collaboration with a PRM server when the security model is the Standard model perform the same procedures as those for connection with PRM R3 10 or later E Collaborating with a PRM Server of R3 02 To enable collaboration with a PRM server when the security model is the Standard model perform the following procedure Then set the logon type and grant remote access permis sion by using the same procedures as those for connection with PRM R3 10 or later Procedure For Standalone Management 1 2 On the SENG running the SOE OPC Interface pac
159. em performance setting 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Maintenance gt System gt Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Settings in the Performance section The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Select the Visual Effects tab and select Adjust for best performance Select the settings you want to use for the appearance and performance of Windows on this computer Let Windows choose what s best for my computer C Animate controls and elements inside windows CO Animate windows when minimizing and maximizing Animations in the taskbar and Start Menu 7 Fade or slide menus into view O Fade or slide ToolTips into view O Fade out menu items after dicking C Show window contents while dragging O Slide open combo boxes C Smooth edges of screen fonts C Smooth scroll list boxes O Use drop shadows for icon labels on the desktop O Use visual styles on windows and buttons Figure B3 2 4 1 Performance Options Dialog Box Visual Effects Tab 5 Click OK E Virtual Memory ProSafe RS does not require virtual memory configuration However if the ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP software coexist on the same computer virtual memory should be configured according to the instruction of CENTUM VP IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows
160. em programs on the SCSs must be in R1 02 or later Control Bus Drivers Install the enhanced control bus driver that is included in the R2 03 59 CD ROM E Procedures for Upgrading In order to use the features added or modified in R2 03 install the R2 03 or later software and open the existing SCS project IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 23 SEE ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 24 Appendix 4 7 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading E Inconsistency Check of TCP IP Settings On a computer running Windows Vista SP2 or Windows Server 2008 SP2 run the TCP IP In consistency Detect Tool after you have upgraded the SENG software to R2 03 If any incon sistency is detected in TCP IP settings run the TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool and then configure the TCP IP settings again re For more information about The tools for detecting and repairing inconsistency in TCP IP setting TCP IP refer to m Procedure 6 Repair TCP IP Settings on page B3 52 E Procedure for Using New and Modified Features After the SENG software has been upgraded to R2 03 some of the features added or modi fied in the R2 03 require further steps such as offline downloading to
161. en installed in the computer to avoid downgrading of MSXML Software that can Coexist with ProSafe RS The ProSafe RS software can coexist with the following software programs The following table lists the software that has been confirmed to function without problems to gether with ProSafe RS Table A3 2 2 List of Software that can Coexist with ProSafe RS Classification Spread sheet 4 Software name Microsoft Excel Version 1 2 3 2013 SP1 2010 SP2 2007 SP3 Remarks Endpoint Security Serv ice 5 Word processor 4 Microsoft Word 2013 SP1 2010 SP2 2007 SP3 Software development Microsoft Visual C 2008 SP1 Microsoft Visual Basic 2008 SP1 WWW browser Microsoft Internet Explor 9 0 8 0 er UPS software APC PowerChute Busi 9 0 1 ness Edition Security Anti virus Software for Model AV11000 Document viewer Adobe Acrobat 11 0 10 1 9 5 6 Adobe Reader 11 0 10 1 9 5 6 Used for the Instruction Manual Package 4 Please confirm the required operation environment of each software for OS on which each software operates 2 SP is an abbreviation of Service Pack 3 The software version has been confirmed at the time of the release of this document For more information about the latest supported version contact YOKOGAWA 4 If CENTUM software is installed on the same computer make sure that installed software also meets the soft
162. ense management station to add the license for the soft ware package additionally required on a license assigned station Also use the License Manager on the license management station to remove the license for the software package no longer required on a license assigned station These operations are called changing license assignments EE l REF For more information about changing license assignments refer to 3 2 Modifying licenses in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment Later gt C2 1 C2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment Later This section describes the procedure for the case when you want to change the system that has been built as a Standalone management system to a Domain management system E Workflow Start Set up the domain controller Configure IT security settings for the domain controller Create domain users to domain groups Add existing stations to the domain Change user management type on the existing stations Add domain users Synchronize the time of stations End Figure C2 1 Workflow for Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment Later E Setup Procedure 1 Prepare a computer to be used as the domain controller and configure a domain control ler on it Configure IT security settings Create doma
163. er To change the security model or user management type first complete the IT security setting procedure with the exiting settings and then change the IT security settings by following the procedure for changing the security settings E Running Procedure 1 When the ProSafe RS software installation is complete a dialog box appears Select Yes want to set up IT security now and click Finish Installation of YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS R3 01 00 was completed ser Information YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS has been successfully installed to your computer Settings Do you want to set up IT security without installing other software products Complete TA No I want to install other software products If you select No you must execute IT security tool after installation Figure B3 5 2 1 ProSafe RS Setup Dialog Box Completed The IT Security Tool starts IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 63 IT Security Settings Select security mode Standard Model Legacy Model Select user management Domain Management Combination Management Standalone Management Figure B3 5 2 2 IT Security Tool Setup 2 On the Select security model pane select either Standard Model or Legacy Model 3 On the Select user management pane select Domain Management Combination Man agement or Standalone Management e
164. er It is necessary to do this setting for each logon user IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B4 2 lt B4 2 Settings of Project Database Folder gt B4 3 Settings of Project Database Folder This section explains the procedure for strengthening the security of project databases E Strengthening the Security of the Project Database on SENG PC When ProSafe RS software is installed C RS Projects folder is automatically created as the default location for saving project data By running the IT Security Tool after the installation share folder settings and security reinforcement are done for this default folder Shown below is the procedure for reinforcing security when you place the project database in a location other than the default folder on an SENG PC and have it shared with other comput ers 1 2 Create a new folder for storing project data Log on as an administrative user belonging to the PSF_MAINTENANCE group and as sign the share name RS Projects to a folder to which the project database is to be stored Grant full control access permissions to Everyone Launch the IT Security Tool from the Start menu and configure security settings without changing the security model and user management type E Strengthening the Security of Version Control Tool s Check in Folder If you place the Version Control Tool s check in folder on an SENG PC follow these steps to strengthen the security of the folder 1
165. er SENG functions First grant the computer licenses at least one license for the test functions of the CENTUM VP packages that operate in coordination Then install the ProSafe RS software from the ProSafe RS software medium Licenses for ProSafe RS software packages are not required If the CENTUM VP coexisting on the computer is earlier than R5 01 the CENTUM VP package that op erates in coordination must be installed with the correct key code The explanation in the subsequent sections assumes that the version of the coexisting CENTUM VP is R5 01 or later When you move the CENTUM package from a computer where the function that operates with CENTUM VP licenses is used fully install the ProSafe RS software also on the new computer E installation on the Computer for Running SCS Simulator SCS simulator is used in combination with the CENTUM packages listed in the following ta ble Licenses for ProSafe RS packages are not required Table B8 1 CENTUM Packages Required for SCS Simulator Model CENTUM VP package name LHS5420 Test Function Package LHS5426 FCS Simulator Package LHM5150 Test Function Package for CENTUM VP Small With CENTUM VP R5 01 or later version perform the following tasks on the computer where you use the SCS simulator Either task can be performed first e Install CENTUM software and grant a license for any of the CENTUM packages in the ta ble e Install ProSafe RS software If the
166. es for Upgrading E Procedure for Using New and Modified Features SEE ALSO SEE ALSO After the SENG software has been upgraded to R2 02 some of the features added or modi fied in the R2 02 require further steps such as offline downloading to SCS before they can be used In the following the steps are explained for each feature For more information about Procedure B and Procedure C that appear in this section refer to Procedure B Master Database Offline Download on page C4 6 Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 New I O Module SDV526 To use the I O module SDV526 newly supported in R2 02 you must perform Procedure C Behavior of AlIO0 DIO modules at Online Change Download To enable online change downloading with the target AlO DIO module kept running when you have changed any settings of I O Parameter Builder that require downloading to the AlO DIO module IOM download you must perform Procedure B If not the target AlO DIO module will be stopped as before For more information about the behaviors of AIO DIO modules during online downloading with software be fore R2 02 refer to mg Behavior of AlO DIO Modules at Online Change Download on page App 4 20 Showing the Results of the Last Analysis on Cross Reference Analyzer To enable the function to show the results of the last analysis after you have upgraded SENG to R2 02 you must o
167. es for the IP address subnet mask and default gateway e Ifthe computer is to be used in an existing environment specify the values used in that network environment e Ifthe computer is to be used in a new environment specify the standard values de termined based on the station address TIP The standard values for VnetIPOpen are as follows IP address 192 168 lt 128 domain number gt lt 129 station number gt 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Specify the IP address of L3SW if another Vnet IP domain exists 1 Normally use a standard value However you can also use other address y y IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 48 ee ea General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 141 193 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 141 253 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Validate settings upon exit Figure B3 3 3 15 IP Address Setting Example Vnet IP Open Communication 4 After the setting is complete
168. et Driver Figure C6 1 2 1 Setup Selection Dialog Box 5 Select UNINSTALL and then click OK A dialog box appears confirming the uninstallation Click OK The uninstallation starts In the uninstallation complete dialog box that appears upon completion of the uninstalla tion click OK Restart the computer A IMPORTANT After uninstalling the driver run the TCP IP Inconsistency Detection Tool If any inconsistency is detected use the TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool and then configure the TCP IP settings again SEE ALso For more information about the TCP IP Inconsistency Detect Tool and TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool re fer to m Procedure 6 Repair TCP IP Settings on page B3 52 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG gt C6 6 E Uninstalling the Vnet IP Open Communication Driver Follow these steps to uninstall the Vnet IP open communication driver 1 2 3 Log on as an administrative user Terminate all applications that are running Set the ProSafe RS software medium in the drive e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the software medium The installation menu appears Click Vnet IP Open com driver The following dialog box appears Welcome This program let you install or un
169. et up the hardware for the SENG IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 7 RES For more information about setting up the hardware of SENG refer to B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware on page B3 2 E Set Up Windows Configure Windows settings on the computer EE l r l ALso For more information about setting up Windows refer to B3 2 Setting Up Windows on page B3 7 E Set Up the Network Configure the network settings SEE ALso For more information about configuring network settings refer to B3 3 Configuring Network Settings on page B3 32 E Install the ProSafe RS Software Install the ProSafe RS software E ALso For more information about installing the ProSafe RS software refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 Configure IT Security Settings Configure IT security settings EE m ALso For more information about configuring IT security settings refer to B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings on page B3 58 E Distribute and Accept Licenses Distribute licenses to the SENG from the license management station and accept the licen ses on the SENG SEE ALso For more information about distributing and accepting licenses refer to B3 6 Distributing and Accepting Licenses on page B3 67 E Create User Accounts Create user accounts EE ALso
170. ettings gt Account Policies gt Password Policy A list of policies is displayed 4 Inthe right pane double click Password must meet complexity requirements The properties dialog box for the policy Password must meet complexity requirements ap pears 5 Select Disabled and click OK Confirm that Disabled is indicated for the policy Password must meet complexity require ments IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 25 File Action View Help es Ama em Security Settings o al ting 8 a Account Policies Lig Enforce password history 0 passwords remem E ASSN Policy Lii Maximum password age 42days Account Lockout Policy ld Minimum password age 0 days a Local Policies ig Minimum password length 0 characters zz Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Password must meet complexity r Enabled E Network List Manager Policies luis Store passwords using reversible Disabled Public Key Policies E Software Restriction Policies a IP Security Policies on Local Computer Figure B3 2 3 6 Local Security Policy Window E Enabling NET Framework 3 5 1 If you are using Windows Server 2008 R2 you must enable NET Framework 3 5 1 as it is disabled by default Follow these steps to enable NET Framework 3 5 1 TIP NET Framework 3 0 is also enabled by the same procedure In this case you can follow the same procedure to enable NET Fram
171. ework 3 0 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Administrative Tools gt Server Manager The Server Manager window appears 3 Inthe left pane select Features and select Add Features in the right pane The Add Features Wizard appears 4 Select the NET Framework 3 5 1 check box under NET Framework 3 5 1 Features and click Next Confirm that the correct feature has been selected for installation and click Install Confirm that the installation is completed and click Close IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 26 By S r dows automatic updating is ret enabled To ensure that your newty instabed role or feature is axtomstically updated turn on Windows Update in Control Panel gt NET Framework 3 5 1 Features installation succeeded The Folowing features were installed NET Framework 3 5 1 Figure B3 2 3 7 Installation Results IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 27 B3 2 4 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 Follow these procedures when you use a Windows 2008 computer E File System Ensure that the file system is in the NTFS format If it is already formatted in the FAT format reinstall the operating system and reformat partitions into NTFS Partitions not installed with OS should also be formatted into NTFS E System Performance Follow these steps to configure the syst
172. fa different version of control bus driver or Vnet IP open communication driver is already installed a dialog box appears prompting you to update the driver Confirm the message and click OK To update the control bus driver uninstall the existing driver and then install the new one after you install the Pro Safe RS software To update the Vnet IP open communication driver install the new driver after you in stall the ProSafe RS software e After updating the Vnet IP open communication driver disable the driver if the computer is to be connec ted to Ethernet 8 Enter the user name and company name It is recommended not to change the installa tion folder from the default location TIP e If you want to change the installation folder click Browse and specify a new location within 50 charac ters e The language is determined automatically by the system language if the system language is Japanese the Japanese version software is installed otherwise the an English version is installed 9 Click Next The installation setting confirmation dialog box appears 10 Confirm that the installation settings are correct and click Install IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software gt B3 57 Installation of the ProSafe RS software is started 11 When the installation complete dialog box appears perform either of the following opera tions e Ifyou install only P
173. face card from the computer Windows judges that the control bus interface card is a newly added device and displays the following dialog box gt Found New Hardware Windows needs to install driver software for your Network Controller Locate and install driver software recommended Windows will guide you through the process of installing driver software for your device gt Ask me again later Windows will ask again the next time you plug in your device or log on Don t show this message again for this device Your device will not function until you install driver software Figure C9 2 2 8 Found New Hardware Dialog Box Click Ask me again later here Then if you do not install the control bus driver shut down the computer and remove the control bus interface card Vnet IP Open Communication Driver If you restart the computer after deleting the Vnet IP open communication driver without re moving the Vnet IP interface card from the computer Windows judges that the Vnet IP inter face card is a newly added device and prompts you to install the driver for it In this case ignore the prompting message and do not install the driver IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D Connection with Other Products gt D 1 D Connection with Other Products ProSafe RS can be connected with YOKOGAWA products such as CENTUM VP PRM and Exaquantum When connecting to these products you may need to cha
174. fer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 72 B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User After creating user accounts configure the required Windows environment settings for each user IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 73 B3 8 1 Configuring on Windows 7 Follow these procedures when you use a Windows 7 computer E Showing Icons on the Task Tray On license assigned stations running Windows 7 you must set so that the License Agent icon is always shown on the task tray 1 Log on using the user account for which the License Agent icon should be displayed 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Notification Area Icons TIP If you cannot find Notification Area Icons select Large icons or Small icons from the View by drop down list in the upper right of the Control Panel window The Notification Area Icons window appears Select which icons and notifications appear on the taskbar F you choose to hide icons and notifications you won t be notified about changes or updates To view hidden icons at any time click the arrow next to the notification area on the taskbar Icons Behaviors 3 Action Ce
175. fer to B3 9 Configuring the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Service on page B3 83 E Password Setting Because security is enhanced in Windows Server 2008 complexity may be required when you set a user password or you may not be able to set a password as intended In this case do the following 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu click Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy The Local security policy window appears 3 Inthe left pane select Security Settings gt Account Policies gt Password Policy A list of policies is displayed 4 Inthe right pane double click Password must meet complexity requirements The properties dialog box for the policy Password must meet complexity requirements ap pears 5 Select Disabled and click OK Confirm that Disabled is indicated for the policy Password must meet complexity require ments IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 31 E Local Security Policy E IP Seaurity Policies on Local Computer Figure B3 2 4 6 Local Security Policy Window IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 32 B3 3 Configuring Network Settings To use the control bus you need to install the control bus driver If Vnet IP is used as the con trol bus you need to install the Vnet IP open communication driver as well This sec
176. fication of SCS Constant Writing to a Single Holding Register has been Changed in R3 02 10 Writing to a Single Holding Register is a setting item of SCS Constants Builder that was added in R3 02 00 In R3 02 10 the specification of this setting item has been changed as fol lows e The item name has been changed from Writing to a Single Holding Register to 16 bit Modbus master support mode e When 16 bit Modbus master support mode is set to Disable there is no difference in the behavior between R3 02 00 and R3 02 10 e The following table describes the behaviors when the SCS system program release num ber is R3 02 00 and when the SCS system program release number is R3 02 10 with 16 bit Modbus master support mode set to Enable There is no difference in writing to a Pre set Single Register between R3 02 00 and R3 02 10 Table Appendix 4 10 2 1 SCS System Program Release Number and the Behavior when 16 bit Mod bus master support mode is Set to Enable SCS system program release number Behavior when 16 bit Modbus master support mode is set to Enable R3 02 00 1 e Preset Single Register function code 06 is avail able e If a multiple register read write command function code 03 04 or 16 is used specifying an even number for the beginning reference number or an odd number for the size of data the error code 10 or 11 hex is returned R3 02 10 e Preset Single Register function code 06 is avail
177. for Microsoft Networks E QoS Packet Scheduler File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 4 Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder TKK OOKK Uninstall Properties TCP IP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks ok _ _ Canca Figure B3 3 3 12 VnetIPOpen Properties Dialog Box 2 Based on Table List of Items Used for Network Connections clear the check boxes for Yokogawa Vnet Protocol and Internet protocol version 6 TCP IPv6 3 After the setting is complete click OK Ethernet Properties 1 Inthe Network Connections window right click Ethernet and select Properties The Ethernet Properties dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 46 pa Ethernet Properties EP Intel R 82578DM Gigabit Network Connection Configure This connection uses the following items Client for Microsoft Networks M E QoS Packet Scheduler vV E Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 4 Yokogawa Vnet Protocol amp Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver 4 Link Layer Topology D
178. fter performing these procedures the administrator and engineers can access the operation history database folder E Setting when Operation History Databases are Placed on SENG PC If you place an operation history database on an SENG PC perform the following procedure to reinforce the security of the folder for storing the operation history database 1 Create a new folder for storing the operation history database 2 Logon to the system as an administrative user who belongs to the PSF_MAINTENANCE group and assign the sharing name RS Share to the folder for storing the operation his tory database 3 If the folder needs to be shared with other computers grant a full control permission to Everyone 4 Launch the IT Security Tool from the Start menu and execute it again without changing the setting made the last time it was executed E Setting when Operation History Databases are Placed on a File SEE Server If you place an operation history database on a computer not installed with the ProSafe RS software and allow SENG to access the database via a network perform the procedure to re inforce security of the file server ALso For more information about the procedure for reinforcing the security of the file server refer to B5 Setting Up a File Server on page B5 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 Setting Up a File Server gt B5 1 B5 Setting Up a File Server Provide a file ser
179. grounding terminal A terminal marked FG also has the same function This terminal is used for grounding other than protective grounding Before using the Product you must ground this terminal Indicates an AC supply Indicates a DC supply Indicates the ON position of a power on off switch _ Indicates the OFF position of a power on off switch E Notes on Handling User s Manuals Hand over the User s Manuals to your end users so that they can keep the User s Man uals on hand for convenient reference Thoroughly read and understand the information in the User s Manuals before using the Product For the avoidance of doubt the purpose of the User s Manuals is not to warrant that the Product is suitable for any particular purpose but to describe the functional details of the Product Contents of the User s Manuals are subject to change without notice IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of contents in the User s Manuals However should you have any questions or find any errors contact us or your local dis tributor The User s Manuals with unordered or missing pages will be replaced E Warning and Disclaimer Except as specified in the warranty terms YOKOGAWQA shall not provide any warranty for the Product YOKOGAWVA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss incurred by either using or not being able to use the Product Notes on Sof
180. gs to protect data in the computer at power supply failures E UPS Software Setting Specify the UPS battery operation time so that the computer can continue operation with the UPS battery without shutting down even if a power supply error for example power interrup tion occurs for a short period of time Use several seconds as a guideline for setting the UPS battery operation time TIP Although the UPS battery operation time can be set longer than several seconds the computer should be shut down at a power interruption of several seconds for safety reasons ee For more information about the UPS software that can coexist with ProSafe RS refer to Software that can Coexist with ProSafe RS on page A3 4 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG gt B4 1 B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG This section describes the settings specific to functions that run on the SENG IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 1 Online Manual Setting gt B4 2 B4 1 Online Manual Setting Configure Adobe Reader to view the online manuals E Setting of Adobe Reader When using Adobe Reader 9 5 10 1 11 0 make sure that the Open cross document links in same window check box is selected e The Open cross document links in same window check box can be displayed by select ing Preferences Documents from the Edit menu of Adobe Read
181. gt B3 28 E Power Options This section describes how to configure the Power Options settings Some of the items in the explanation may not be displayed on your computer depending on the computer s hardware configuration If not displayed the function of that item is not available on your computer 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Power Options The Power Options window appears 3 Select High performance under Preferred plans and click Change plan settings below it The Edit Plan Settings window appears 4 Click Change advanced power settings The Power Options dialog box appears showing the advanced settings TIP Depending on the computer configuration the items of unavailable functions will not be displayed in the step results hereafter 5 Under Hard disk set the setting for Turn off hard disk after to Never Power Options 21x Advanced settings Select the power plan that you want to customize and then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power High performance Active Additional settings Require a password on wakeup Setting Yes Hard disk Turn off hard disk after Setting Minutes Never pes Sleep USB settings Power buttons and lid PCI Express hd P H Restore plan defaults 14
182. hanging link between a channel and a variable Yes Adding changing or deleting subsystem communica Yes tion definitions Changing wiring of communication input output FBs Yes 4 Yes Changeable by online change download No Offline download is required Constants and Network Information that are Changeable Online Table Appendix 4 7 2 3 Constants and Network Classification Modification Online Change 1 Configuration Name No Password No 2 Resource Name No Resource Number No Scan period No Number of variables permitted for No online Size of temporary variables and No constants area Network IP address No Station address No Inter SCS safety Communication No Binding Optional ESB BUS Repeater Optional ESB BUS Repeater No Max extension distance No 1 No Offline download is required 2 Setting and changing passwords is ignored Builder Definitions that are Changeable Online The following table shows whether online change downloading is possible after you have changed definitions using builders IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 28 Table Appendix 4 7 2 4 Online Change Download Builders Online Change 1 SCS Constants Builder No I O Parameter Builder Yes Communication I O Builder Yes SCS Link Transmission Builder Yes Modbus Address Builder Yes Tag Name Builder Yes
183. has been set up be sure to save the security settings on the computer be fore you use the tool Keep the saved data in a safe place because the data will be required when you initialize the configured security settings Follow these steps to save the security settings before your run the IT Security Tool 1 Log on to the computer as the user who belongs to the Domain Admins and PSF_MAIN TENANCE groups 2 Insert the ProSafe RS software medium into the drive e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the software medium The installation menu appears 3 Click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use The IT Security Tool starts IT Security Tool Figure B2 3 4 IT Security Tool menu 4 Click Save to save the security settings SEE For more information about the subsequent steps to save the IT security settings refer to C8 2 1 Procedure for SENG PC on page C8 9 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller gt B2 8 E Configuring IT Security Settings 1 From the IT Security Tool menu click Setup A confirmation dialog box appears 2 Ifyou have saved the aforementioned security setting data for initialization click OK The Select Security Mo
184. he IT security setting operations that are performed following the ProSafe RS software installation refer to B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tool on page B3 62 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server gt B5 7 Procedure 5 Create Accounts on the File Server for Users who Access Project Data On the file server computer create accounts for users who access the project data according to the selected security model and user management type Standard Model with Domain Combination Management On the domain controller add the accounts for accessing projects No account needs to be created if already created Legacy Standard Model with Standalone Management Perform the following procedure on the file server 1 TIP Create a user account The user name and the password must be the same as those of the SENG PCs from which the projects are accessed Register the user you have created to the same group as that on the SENG PCs which access the file server If the Standard model is applied the following user groups have been created during the procedures so far PSF_MAINTENANCE PSF_OPERATOR PSF_ENGINEER PSF_OPC E Procedure 6 Create the Project Folder on the File Server and Start the Operation Project database From an SENG PC create an RS project under the shared folder RS Projects created in Procedure 2 Check in folder of Vers
185. he Network Connections window select Advanced Set tings The Advanced Settings dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 50 TIP If you cannot find the Advanced menu press the Alt key to display the menu bar Adapters and Bindings Provider Order Connections are listed in the order in which they are accessed by network services Connections ath Ethemet O 83 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks O a Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 O a Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 C 0 Client for Microsoft Networks O amp Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 O 4 Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 Figure B3 3 3 17 Advanced Settings Network binding setting is inappropriate In the above figure the control bus has higher priority than the Ethernet because the con trol bus Vnet driver was installed later than the Ethernet driver 2 Use the arrow buttons next to the Connections box to set the priority of Ethernet higher than Vnet Adapters and Bindings Provider Order Connections are listed in the order in which they are accessed by network services O d File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks CO amp Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 O amp Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 C o Client for Microsoft Networks O amp Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 O amp Intemet Protocol Versio
186. he control bus driver and Vnet IP open communication driver Upgrading Control Bus Driver When you upgrade the control bus driver uninstall the current control bus driver first and then install the latest control bus driver SEE ALso For more information about the uninstallation procedure of control bus driver refer to mg Uninstalling Control Bus Driver on page C6 5 For more information about installing the control bus driver refer to B3 3 1 Installing the Control Bus Driver on page B3 33 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C4 1 Installation for Upgrading gt C4 3 Upgrading Vnet IP Open Communication Driver The procedure to upgrade Vnet IP open communication driver is the same as the installation procedure of Vnet IP open communication driver If it is necessary to upgrade the Vnet IP open communication driver you can select INSTALL in the Setup dialog box Be sure to reboot the computer after upgrading the Vnet IP open communication driver EE l as ALso For more information about installing the Vnet IP open communication driver refer to B3 3 2 Installing the Vnet IP Open Communication Driver on page B3 35 E Procedure for Update Installation Follow these steps below to upgrade the ProSafe RS software TIP TIP 1 2 Log on as an administrative user Insert the ProSafe RS software medium to the drive The ProSafe RS installation menu appears If
187. iiciin cinerea aaaeei App 4 1 Appendix 4 1 Upgrading to R1 01 30 ccc eee eeeeeeseeeeeee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeesnenees App 4 2 Appendix 4 2 Upgrading to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 eceeetceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeneeeeeeees App 4 6 Appendix 4 3 Upgrading to R1 02 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeneeeees App 4 8 Appendix 4 4 Upgrading to R1 03 cccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeees App 4 11 Appendix 4 5 Upgrading to R2 01 cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeneeeees App 4 15 Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 ccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeees App 4 17 Appendix 4 6 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading ccceeeeeee App 4 18 Appendix 4 6 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions cee App 4 20 Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaneeeees App 4 22 Appendix 4 7 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading cccceeeeeee App 4 24 Appendix 4 7 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions cee App 4 26 Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 cccsceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 4 29 Appendix 4 8 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading cccceeeeeeeee App 4 30 Appendix 4 8 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions ccee App 4 31 Appendix 4 9 Upgrading to Version R3 02 00 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees App 4 36
188. in users Add the domain users to domain groups Add the client computer stations to the domain oa fF oN On each station change the user management type to Domain management or Combi nation management 7 Synchronize the time of the stations within the domain IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment Later gt C2 2 SEE ALso For more information about configuring the domain controller refer to B2 2 Configuring the Domain Controller Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 on page B2 3 For more information about configuring IT security settings on the domain controller refer to B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller on page B2 5 For more information about how to create domain users and add them to domain groups refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 For more information about how to add client computers to a domain refer to B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain on page B2 13 For more information about how to set up time synchronization within a domain refer to B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment on page B2 19 For more information about changing the user management type refer to C8 1 2 Procedures for a File Server or Domain Controller on page C8 5 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C3 Backing Up the System gt C3 1 C3 Back
189. ing Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management on page B6 1 Back Up the License Projects Back up the license projects managed on the previous computer For more information about the procedure for backing up the license projects refer to 3 6 Backing up and restoring a license project in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E Restore the Backed Up Data Restore the backed up data on the new computer For more information about the backed up data refer to C3 Backing Up the System on page C3 1 Restore the License Projects Restore the license projects from the backup For more information about the procedure for restoring the license projects refer to m Restoring a license project in another license management station in 3 6 Backing up and restoring a license project in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E Redistribute Licenses to License Assigned Stations Redistribute licenses to the license assigned stations For more information about redistributing licenses from the license management station refer to 3 4 Redistributing licenses to license assigned stations in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 Maintenance Tasks Related to IT Security gt C8 1 C8 Maintenance Tasks Related to IT Security This section describes the tasks related to IT security settings that are performed apart from new or u
190. ing Up the System To be prepared for system failures it is recommended to back up the system periodically The files in the folders listed in the following table should be regularly backed up Table C3 1 Folder Backups Contents Folder Registry When to back up e When changes have been made to f ae 7 the system for example after pro Backup Ot entire Wim All hard disk Entire reg gram installation or completion of dows istry setup e After closing all applications al engineering scs project folders After closing the SENG software When you back up a system where the Standard model of IT security settings is applied log on to Windows as an administrative user who has the right to access ProSafe RS related folders E Backing Up Entire Windows Back up Windows using a commercially available software program in preparation against disk trouble E Creating Windows Repair Disk Installing various application programs on a computer can cause troubles for example Win dows does not start up or you cannot log on to Windows In such cases if you have a system repair disk and boot disk you can restore the system to the state at the time you created these disks To be prepared for Windows troubles create a system repair disk and boot disk when you have changed the state of the system by installing a program changing hardware configura tion etc E _ ALso For more information about how to creat
191. ing the logon type and e When the Standard model is applied to Pro Safe RS and the Legacy model to Exaquantum Table D1 3 1 3 Connection information Different security model Case 2 0202 0801 02 01 Product 1 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Continues on the next page IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 SEE D1 18 lt D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum gt Table D1 3 1 3 Connection information Different security model Case 2 Table continued Product 2 PIMS server of Exaquantum R2 60 or later Security model Legacy model ProSafe RS Standard model Exaquantum User manage ment type of Exa quantum Standalone management Domain Combination management Required proce dures Refer to e Setting the logon type and e When the Legacy model is applied to Pro Safe RS and the Standard model to Exaquantum Table D1 3 1 4 Connection information Legacy model applied ProSafe RS and Exaquantum version earlier than R2 60 Integration code 0202 0801 02 02 Product 1 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Product 2 PIMS server of Exaquantum R2 20 or later but earlier than R2 60 Security model Legacy model ProSafe RS Exaquantum User manage ment type Required proce dures Refer to e Setting the logon type and e When the Legacy model is applied to both products Table D1 3
192. ings The System Properties dialog box appears 4 Inthe System Properties dialog box select the Computer Name tab and click Change The Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box appears 5 On the Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box select Domain enter the domain name and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain gt B2 16 You can change the name and the membership of this computer Changes might affect access to network resources More information Computer name DOCHIS0162 Full computer name DOCHIS0162 Member of Domain pidom Workgroup WORKGROUP Figure B2 5 4 Computer Name Domain Changes Dialog Box 6 Inthe dialog box that is displayed enter the user name and password of the administra tive user of the domain and click OK TIP An error message dialog box may appear indicating that the domain name cannot be changed However you can click OK to proceed because the computer has been added to the domain successfully 7 On the Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box click OK 8 On the dialog box for confirmation of restarting click Restart Now to restart the comput er E Configuration on a Client Computer Windows Vista Follow these steps to add a Windows Vista computer to the domain 1 From the Start menu select Computer The Computer window appears 2 Inthe Computer window click Syste
193. install Vnet IP Open Communication Driver Choose one of the options below C INSTALL Install Vnet IP Open Communication Driver to your system UNINSTALL Remove all installed Vnet IP Open Communication Drivers Figure C6 1 2 2 Setup Selection Dialog Box 5 8 Select UNINSTALL and then click OK A dialog box appears confirming the uninstallation Click OK The uninstallation starts In the uninstallation complete dialog box that appears upon completion of the uninstalla tion click OK Restart the computer A IMPORTANT After uninstalling the driver run the TCP IP Inconsistency Detection Tool If any inconsistency is detected use the TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool and then configure the TCP IP settings again RES For more information about the TCP IP Inconsistency Detect Tool and TCP IP Inconsistency Repair Tool re fer to mg Procedure 6 Repair TCP IP Settings on page B3 52 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C6 2 Uninstallation on the computer Dedicated to License Management gt C6 7 C6 2 Uninstallation on the computer Dedicated to License Management This section describes the procedure for uninstalling the license management software on the computer dedicated to license management E Running the Uninstallation Follow these steps to uninstall the license management software 1 Log on as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel
194. ion Control Tool On an SENG PC use the Version Control Tool to specify a folder under the shared folder RS Share created in Procedure 2 as the check in destination folder and start project operation Operation history database On an SENG PC use the operation history management setting tool to specify a folder under the shared folder RS Share created in Procedure 2 as the top folder of the opera tion history database and start the access control and operation history management function IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 2 Setting Up the File Server Function on SENG gt B5 8 B5 2 Setting Up the File Server Function on SENG This section describes the required settings when you use a computer that has been set up as an SENG also to be used as a file server TIP On an SENG the project database is created under the installation folder by default The procedure descri bed in this section is for the case when the project database is placed in a location other than the installation folder 1 Setup a computer as an SENG TIP You do not need to configure security settings during this setup 2 On the computer create and set up the shared folder 3 Start the IT Security Tool from the Start menu and configure IT security settings 4 Create a project folder in a location under the shared folder of the computer Ay IMPORTANT On a computer used as both a file server and an SENG do n
195. iple calls If you find that the multiple calls are necessary acknowledge the results of analysis in Integrity Analyzer and you can download the program to SCS without change In this case the program can be used as a function allowed for safety application af ter verifying its validity in user tests Checking for Writing to Output Variable Status I O variable statuses status are the data that reflect the actual statuses normal abnormal of I O channels Therefore they should not be changed by user logic Integrity Analyzer in R2 02 detects writing to output variable statuses and raises an error In revisions before R2 02 no such error is raised But this error will be raised after you have upgraded to R2 02 when there is any program that writes to any output variable status If an error message is displayed change the program to eliminate the writing to output variable statuses IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 gt App 4 20 Appendix 4 6 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions E Behavior of AlO DIO Modules at Online Change Download When online change downloading is performed after you have changed any settings of I O Parameter Builder that require downloading to I O modules IOM download the target AlO DIO modules continue operation if the SCS system program revision is R2 02 or later while the AlO DIO modules are stopped with revisions earlier than R2 02 This section explains
196. is computer Animate controls and elements inside windows Animations in the taskbar and Start Menu Enable Aero Peek Enable desktop composition Enable transparent glass Fade or slide menus into view Fade or slide ToolTips into view Fade out menu items after clicking Save taskbar thumbnail previews Show shadows under mouse pointer Show shadows under windows Show thumbnails instead of icons Show translucent selection rectangle Show window contents while dragging Slide open combo boxes Ta Smooth edges of screen fonts Smooth scroll list boxes X Canann apply Figure B3 2 2 1 Performance Options Dialog Box Visual Effects Tab SSS SS8S5S8S8S8 T T m S S S S S S 9S 5 Click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 E Virtual Memory ProSafe RS does not require virtual memory configuration However if the ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP software coexist on the same computer virtual memory should be configured according to the instruction of CENTUM VP E Power Options This section describes how to configure the Power Options settings Some of the items in the explanation may not be displayed on your computer depending on the computer s hardware configuration If not displayed the function of that item is not available on your computer
197. iscovery Responder Install Uninstall Properties Descripti Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network K K K Figure B3 3 3 13 Ethernet Properties Dialog Box 2 Based on Table List of Items Used for Network Connections clear the check boxes for Yokogawa Vnet Protocol and Internet protocol version 6 TCP IPv6 3 After the setting is complete click OK E Procedure 3 Set IP Addresses On Windows DHCP is enabled by default after a network driver is installed However since ProSafe RS does not use DHCP you need to set IP addresses You need to set IP addresses also when the system is used in the domain environment Set the IP addresses according to the network configuration of the system Setting IP Address for Vnet 1 Inthe Network Connections window right click the Vnet icon and select Properties The Vnet Properties dialog box appears 2 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP Ipv4 and click Properties The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP Ipv4 Properties dialog box appears 3 Select Use the following IP address and set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Set the IP address to a standard value that is determined based on the station address of the computer as long as there is no special reason TIP The standard values for Vnet are as follows IP address 172 16 Domai
198. ity MSB Most Significant Bit LSB Least Significant Bit Figure B3 1 2 Domain Number Setting DIP Switches For more information about domain numbers and corresponding DIP switch positions refer to Em Domain Numbers and DIP Switch Positions on page App 1 1 Setting the Station Number Station numbers should be set in the range of 1 to 64 it is recommended to set starting from 64 in the descending order STATION NO MSB LSB 45678 E o viabdais ET L Station number 7 bits Parity of the station number 1 bits odd parity MSB Most Significant Bit LSB Least Significant Bit Figure B3 1 3 Station Number Setting DIP Switches For more information about station numbers and corresponding DIP switch positions refer to m Station Numbers and DIP Switch Positions on page App 1 2 Precautions on Installing the Control Bus Interface Card e Install VF702 VF701 in the computer after setting up Windows but before configuring the network settings e Install the control bus driver when you restart the computer after installing VF702 VF701 Follow the procedure in this manual to install the driver For more information about the procedure to install the control bus driver in a computer refer to B3 3 1 Installing the Control Bus Driver on page B3 33 Installing the Control Bus Interface Card After you have set the station address on the
199. ix 1 Setting Switches gt App 1 2 E Station Numbers and DIP Switch Positions The following table lists the station numbers and corresponding setting switch positions for the control bus interface card and Vnet IP interface card Set the DIP switches as shown in the table to adjust to the required station number Table Appendix 1 2 Station Numbers and DIP Switch Positions Station number DIP switch bit number 4 5 CO N OD oa BR wl nm 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 oO gt amp my o OoyOoyOory mas as sy OP OF oy ory mas ass es ey OP O Oy oy mas as ss er OL Oy OTe ofa alaolos a a a0o os sa a a0fo aje oloja af o0ofo sa al a0 of 3 0 of oj 33 O O 0 0 0 0 07 07 OF CO OC OF CO OO QO 07 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF CO OF CO OL oO o o o oy n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07 OF OF OF OF OF O OLTo o oy yol ol alyaoay yo yjol aoa o oo of ae oO 1 o gt gt ta gt t ap a a aS SS sa ss OL OTL 9 OT OP 90 9O0 9 9 O oJ ojojoj o oO o gt mat ap ap as as ss rp 9 OT ojojoj OoOyCOoryYyCUOomry Lama a as as ss ss rt o9 oj OT OY oO oOo oOo IM 32Q01C50 31E 0 0 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
200. ix 4 9 Upgrading to Version R3 02 00 This section provides cautionary notes for upgrading from R3 01 to R3 02 00 Before you up grade also read the cautionary notes for upgrading to the previous versions that were issued after the software version currently installed on your computer and perform the required tasks for each upgrade A IMPORTANT When integrating ProSafe RS with CENTUM VP it is recommended that the version of CENTUM VP is R5 02 00 or later E Software Revisions The respective software release number of R3 02 is as follows Software Release R3 02 xx 1 e SENG software release number R3 02 xx 1 e SCS system program release number R3 02 xx 1 1 xx will be changed in accordance with the software revisions after the release of R3 02 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program of an SCS that performs Inter SCS safety communication with SCS with system program version R3 02 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCSs must be of R1 02 or later Control Bus Driver You do not need to update the control bus driver if the control bus driver provided in R3 01 is installed on the computer The control bus driver of ProSafe RS R3 01 is compatible with the control bus driver provided in CENTUM VP R85 01 and R5 02 E Basic Procedure of Revision Upgrading In order to use the features added
201. k Settings gt B3 43 Organize Ethernet Vnet pT Ress sien AF Intel R 82578DM Gigabit Networ Vokogawa Vnet Adapter Figure B3 3 3 9 Network Connections V net Network After Renaming File Edit View Tools Advanced Help Organize v Vnet VnetiPOpen Unidentified network Unidentified network Yokogawa Vnet Adapter Vnet IP Open Communication Dr Figure B3 3 3 10 Network Connections Vnet IP Network After Renaming TIP In the instruction manuals until ProSafe RS R2 03 it is instructed to change the name of control bus commu nication connection when Vnet IP is used to VnetIP rather than Vnet E Procedure 2 Configure Properties In the properties of each type of network connection you need to configure the items to be used Configure the properties as necessary according to the network configuration of the system Table B3 3 3 3 List of Items Used for Network Connections Item Network 1 Ethernet VnetIPOpen Vnet Microsoft network client x x QoS packet scheduler X X Microsoft network file and printer sharing X X Yokogawa Vnet Protocol X Internet protocol version 6 TCP IPv6 Internet protocol version 4 TCP IPv4 X X X Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper I O Driver x X Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder X X 14 X Item used Item not used IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 l
202. kage create the program user of PRM The user name and password should be as follows User name PRMUSER Password PRMUSER Add the program user you have created to the PSF_OPC group Procedure For Domain Management or Combination Management A On the SENG running the SOE OPC Interface package create the program user of PRM The user name and password should be as follows User name PRMUSER Password PRMUSER 2 Add the program user you have created to the PSF_OPC_LCL group IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum gt D1 1 6 D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum This section describes the settings when connecting ProSafe RS and Exaquantum IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 D1 17 lt D1 3 ProSafe RS and Exaquantum gt ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package and Exaquantum PIMS Server Connecting the CHS2200 SOE OPC Interface Package and Exaquantum PIMS Server ena bles the Exaquantum PIMS Server to collect SOE data from SCS through the OPC interface D1 3 1 E Enabling Exaquantum to collect SOE data from SCS To use Exaquantum PIMS Server as an OPC client and perform OPC communication with an SENG running the SOE OPC Interface Package you need to perform the settings described below The following table shows the connection information For required procedures for connec tion read the descriptions that follow the table The logon type setting on the SENG and the
203. ks when connecting CENTUM VP with other products refer to D Connection with Other Products on page D 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment gt B2 1 B2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment This section describes the required settings when ProSafe RS is used in a Windows domain environment You may also set up the Windows domain environment at a later stage ree For more information about setting up the Windows domain environment at a later stage refer to C2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment Later on page C2 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 1 Overview of Setting Up the Domain Environment gt B2 2 B2 1 Overview of Setting Up the Domain Environment This section explains the overview of setting up the Windows domain environment It is recommended to provide dual redundant domain controllers because the entire system will have troubles if the only domain controller fails E Workflow The following figure shows the procedure for setting up the Windows domain environment Start Set up the domain controller Configure IT security settings for the domain controller Create domain users Add client computers to the domain End Figure B2 1 1 Flow of setting up the Windows domain environment E Items to be Determined in Advance e Domain name e P Address of the
204. led ProSafe RS software of R2 01 or lat er version E ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 5 Upgrading to R2 01 gt App 4 1 6 E Procedure for Upgrading from R2 01 00 to R2 01 10 Carry out the following procedure to upgrade your system 1 Fora Windows Vista computer with no CENTUM VP software install the Windows hotfix program provided in the CD ROM of R2 01 10 Update the control bus drivers using the ProSafe RS software CD ROM of R2 01 10 Without using the key code FD carry out installation to upgrade from R2 01 00 to R2 01 10 This installation should be done by following the procedure for revision upgrad ing without package addition A IMPORTANT If any software package should be added install it only after you have upgraded the system from R2 01 00 to R2 01 10 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 gt App 4 1 7 Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 In this section the cautionary notes for upgrading from R2 01 to R2 02 will be explained Be fore you upgrade read also the cautionary notes for the previous revisions issued after the software version currently installed on your computer A IMPORTANT When integrating ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP the new features added to ProSafe RS R2 01 are su
205. lick OK A Windows Security dialog box appears confirming installation of network protocol Make sure that the Always trust software from Yokogawa Electric Corporation check box is clear and click Install Another Windows Security dialog box appears confirming installation of the network adapter Make sure that the Always trust software from Yokogawa Electric Corporation check box is clear and click Install Do not click Don t Install on the Windows Security dialog boxes If clicked an error occurs Do not select the Always trust software from Yokogawa Electric Corporation check box If selected a confirmation dialog box will not appear during the subsequent installations 8 When the message telling successful installation is displayed click OK If you have added or deleted any other devices before you install the control bus driver a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed In such a case be sure to restart the computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B3 3 2 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 35 Installing the Vnet IP Open Communication Driver When Vnet IP is used as the control bus the Vnet IP open communication driver also needs to be installed If Ethernet is also used the installed Vnet IP open communication driver must be disabled This section describes the procedure for installing the Vnet IP open communication driver
206. llow the dialog box closes auto matically Then a dialog box indicating failure of uninstallation appears and the uninstallation is discontinued In this case run the uninstallation again 6 In the uninstallation complete dialog box that appears upon completion of the uninstalla tion do either of the following operations e To restart the computer now select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish e To restart the computer later select No will restart my computer later and click Finish IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 C6 1 2 lt C6 1 Uninstallation on SENG gt C6 5 Uninstalling the Network Drivers This section describes how to uninstall the network drivers E Uninstalling Control Bus Driver Follow these steps to uninstall the control bus driver 1 2 3 Log on as an administrative user Terminate all applications that are running Set the ProSafe RS software medium in the drive e If the AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the software medium The installation menu appears Click Control Bus Driver The following dialog box appears Welcome This program let you install or uninstall Vnet Driver Choose one of the options below INSTALL Install Vnet Driver to your system UNINSTALL Remove installed Vn
207. log box on HIS and the MV value remains unchanged E Notice on the Variables Begin with Underscore Characters From R1 03 the variable and the Defined Words begin with underscore character will be han dled differently by the system Specification Prior to R1 03 Prior to R1 03 to start the variable or the Defined Words with underscore character is prohibi ted however if you started the variable or the Defined Words with underscore character no error would be indicated Specification for R1 03 or Later Since R1 03 the variable or Defined Words begin with underscore character can be used however if they are identical with system reserved words an error will be indicated The sys tem reserved words are as follows e System Reserved Words _AND CALL CALL_IEC_SFC_FB END GOTO _IF NOT PUSH PAR OR _POP_CSTK PUSH_CSTK RET STEP XOR IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 5 Upgrading to R2 01 gt App 4 1 5 Appendix 4 5 Upgrading to R2 01 The notices on version upgrading from R1 03 to R2 01 R2 01 10 or later will be explained in this section Before upgrading installation the documents regarding the currently installed ProSafe RS software as well as the release notes for the previous upgrading installations should be read first In this section the procedure for upgrading from R2 01 00 to R2 01 10 will also be explained If R2 01 00 is installed in your computer you need to upgrade the
208. lowing e Windows Driver Display Model WDDM e Pixel Shader 2 0 e 32 bits per pixel e 128 MB graphic memory Peripheral unit e DVD ROM drive e A PCI slot or PCI Express slot for the control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface card e A DAT drive or hard disk unit for backing up engineering data which encompasses project databases and various databases used during operation E Hardware Requirements for a File Server The hardware requirements for the computer used as a file server are as follows Table A3 1 2 Hardware Requirements for a File Server Component Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 CPU 2 GHz or higher Main memory 2 GB or more Hard disk space e 20 GB or more free space mandatory 50 GB or more free space recommended However if you store an operation history database 100 GB or more is recommended Display SuperVGA 800 x 600 or higher mandatory Peripheral unit e DVD ROM drive mandatory e Network adapter mandatory IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 A3 2 A3 3 lt A3 2 Software Requirements gt Software Requirements This section describes the software requirements for SENG It also explains the software that can collaborate with ProSafe RS and software that can co exist on the same computer E Software Requirements for SENG This section describes the software requirements for SENG Supported OS The following table shows the corres
209. m ber of the integration code for their combination and use the most recent setting procedure Package codes The following table describes the package codes of various YOKOGAWVA products Table D1 2 Package codes Package code Product Package 0101 CENTUM VP CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function 1 0102 CENTUM VP System Builder Function 0108 CENTUM VP Report Package 0153 CENTUM VP SOE Viewer Package 0196 CENTUM VP Project Database 0201 ProSafe RS Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function Package 0202 ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package 0203 ProSafe RS CENTUM VP CS 3000 Integration Engineering Package 0204 ProSafe RS FAST TOOLS Integration Engineering Package 0251 ProSafe RS SOE Viewer Package 0301 PRM Plant Resource Manager Field Communications Server 0302 PRM Plant Resource Manager Server 0351 PRM Plant Resource Manager DeviceViewer 0401 Exaopc Exaopc OPC Interface Package 0801 Exaquantum PIMS Server 0851 Exaquantum Explorer Client 1202 STARDOM STARDOM FCN FCJ OPC Server 1 As an optional function for this package Exaopc OPC Interface Package for HIS is available Consolidated Alarm Manage ment Function CAMS for HIS is included in Standard Operation and Monitoring Function IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 3 D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS This section describes the settings when connecting
210. m Properties The System window appears 3 Inthe System window click Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 4 Inthe System Properties dialog box select the Computer Name tab and click Change The Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box appears 5 On the Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box select Domain enter the domain name and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain gt B2 17 Computer Name Domain Changes You can change the name and the membership of this computer Changes might affect access to network resources More information Computer name HIS0164 Full computer name HIS0164 Member of Domain CENTUMVP Workgroup WORKGROUP Figure B2 5 5 Computer Name Domain Changes Dialog Box 6 Inthe dialog box that is displayed enter the user name and password of the administra tive user of the domain and click OK On the Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box click OK On the dialog box for confirmation of restarting click Restart Now to restart the comput er IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 6 Setting Up Redundant Domain Controllers gt B2 18 B2 6 Setting Up Redundant Domain Controllers It is recommended to provide another domain controller for redundancy because the entire system will have troubles if the only domain controller fails E Setup Proc
211. m alarm messages added in ProSafe RS R2 03 1 Continues on the next page IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A3 2 Software Requirements gt A3 6 Table A3 2 5 CS 3000 Release Numbers Required to Use Each Function of ProSafe RS Table contin ued Function of ProSafe RS Release number of CS 3000 SCS simulation test R3 08 50 or later Interface functions for plant training SCS link transmission Override function blocks with group function Functional changes of password function blocks Specification changes to ANLG_S function blocks in Pro Safe RS R1 03 process alarms etc R3 08 50 or later e Manual operation function blocks MOB_11 MOB_ 21 R3 08 or later MOB_RS MOA e Vnet IP network connection of SCS e Sub system communication function Modbus communica R3 07 or later tion e SYS_SEC_CTL security level protection function blocks 1 In CS 3000 of earlier than R3 09 system alarm messages added in R2 03 are not displayed The same messages displayed as when manually executing IOM download are displayed at execution of automatic IOM download SEE ALso For more information about system alarm messages of R2 03 that cannot be displayed on CS 3000 earlier than R3 09 and CENTUM VP of earlier than R4 02 refer to Appendix 1 Differences in limitations and specifications among software release numbers of CENTUM in Integration with CENTUM VP CS 3000 IM 32Q01E10 31E e IT
212. manuals you can view the referenced content by click ing the links that are in green text However this action does not apply to the links that are in black text E Typographical Conventions The following typographical conventions are used throughout the User s Manuals Commonly Used Conventions throughout the User s Manuals e A Mark Indicates that a space must be entered between character strings Example ALAPIC010A SC e Character string enclosed by braces Indicates character strings that may be omitted Example PRATAG A sheet name Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations e Characters enclosed by brackets When characters are enclosed by brackets in the description of a key or button operation it indicates a key on the keyboard a button name in a window or an item in a list box displayed in a window Example To alter the function press the ESC key Conventions of a User defined Folder e User defined folder name enclosed by parenthesis User definable path is written in a pair of parentheses Example RS Project Folder SCS0101 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 If the RS Project Folder is C MYRSPJT the above path becomes C MYRSPJTSCS0101 E Drawing Conventions Drawings used in the User s Manuals may be partially emphasized simplified or omitted for the convenience of description Drawings of windows may be slightly different from the actual screen
213. mber of list IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 4 Creating Domain Users gt B2 12 Setting Administrative Rights Follow these steps to assign administrative rights to a domain user who belongs to a domain group which requires administrative rights 1 Add the domain user to the Domain Admins group 2 Open the properties dialog box for the user Click the Member Of tab select Domain Admins and click Set Primary Group The primary group of the user changes to Domain Admins Select Domain Users and click Remove 4 Confirm that Domain User has been removed from the Member of list and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B2 5 lt B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain gt B2 13 Adding Client Computers to the Domain To add client computers to a domain computer accounts of the client computers need to exist on the domain controller Computer accounts can be created in two ways creating on the do main controller computer or on client computers When creating a computer account on the domain controller the client computer can be add ed to the domain by configuring on the client computer after the computer account is created When creating a computer account on the client computer the client computer is added to the domain at the same time the computer account is created This section explains the procedure for the case where computer accounts are created on the domai
214. mbination management Legacy model Administrators of the lo Administrators and PSF_MAINTE Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE cal computer NANCE of the local computer NANCE of the domain 1 1 Log on to the computer when the computer is connected to the domain E Procedure 1 Prepare to Configure IT Security Settings on a File Server Perform one of the following procedures according to the security model to be applied Legacy Model 1 Log on as a member of the Administrators group 2 Perform one of the following operations e On Windows Server 2008 R2 enable NET Framework 3 5 1 e On Windows Server 2008 enable NET Framework 3 0 Restart the computer 4 Logon using the same user account as in step 1 nee For more information about how to enable NET Framework 3 5 1 and 3 0 refer to mg Enabling NET Framework 3 5 1 on page B3 25 Standard Model with Standalone Management 1 Log on as a member of the Administrators group Create the PSF_MAINTENANCE group Add the user to be set as the administrator to the Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE groups TIP If any other YOKOGAWA product coexists in the computer the user also needs to be a member of the MAIN TENANCE group of the coexisting product For example if CENTUM VP coexists also add the user to the CTM_MAINTENANCE group 4 Perform one of the following operations e On Windows Server 2008 R2 enable NET Framework 3 5 1 e On Windo
215. more information about configuring the IT security settings refer to B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings on page B3 58 Redistribute Licenses from the License Management Station Redistribute the licenses from the license management station EE Ra l ALso For more information about redistributing licenses from the license management station refer to 3 4 Redistributing licenses to license assigned stations in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E Configure Function Specific Settings Configure the settings specific to the functions that run on the SENG SEE ALso For more information about configuring the settings specific to each function of SENG refer to B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG on page B4 1 E Reinstallation for the License Management Station This section describes the reinstallation procedure for the license management station The license management station can be a computer installed with the ProSafe RS software or a computer dedicated to license management where only the license management software is installed You need to perform reinstallation according to the type of the license management station IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 1 When the Computer Used is the Same gt C7 4 Start Reinstallation Back Up License Project 1 Uninstall Install Configure IT Security Settings
216. n 6 TCP IPv6 Figure B3 3 3 18 Advanced Settings Network binding setting is appropriate IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 51 3 Click OK The setting of bindings is finished TIP After changing the bindings there is no need to restart the computer A IMPORTANT e Do not change the priority of Remote Access connections so as to keep it at the lowest position e There is no need to configure the settings on the Provider Order tab e Do not change the bindings for Ethernet Vnet and VnetIPOpen that are shown in the Bindings box below the Connections box E Setup Procedure 5 Change Computer Name It is recommended to set the station names used in the ProSafe RS system as the computer names 1 Select Control Panel gt System and Security gt System gt Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 2 Inthe Computer Name tab click Change The Computer Name Domain Changes dialog box appears 3 Enter the station name as the new computer name case insensitive for the computer Computer Name Domain Changes You can change the name and the membership of this lore informatior Computer name SENG1364 Full computer name SENG1364 Member of Domain Workgroup WORKGROUP Figure B3 3 3 19 Computer Name Domain Changes Dialog Box 4 Click OK A message box appears to prompt for restarting
217. n controller In the procedure you are required to enter the user name and password of the administrative user of the domain when you configure on a client computer E Precautions When Setting Up Client Computers When ProSafe RS is used in a domain environment add the client computer to the do main before you install the ProSafe RS software In the IT security setting configuration that is performed following the ProSafe RS software installation select the Standard model applying either the Domain management or Combination management If you are unable to add the client computer to the domain in advance set the Legacy model or the Standard model applying Standalone management temporarily in the IT se curity setting configuration that is performed following the ProSafe RS software installa tion Then add the computer to the domain and change to the Standard model applying Domain management or Combination management When you install the ProSafe RS software on a client computer that is a domain member you need to log on as the administrative user of the domain So in advance create on the domain controller computer an administrative user who installs the ProSafe RS soft ware and add the user to the Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTENANCE groups After installing the ProSafe RS software add the administrative user of the client comput er to the PSF_MAINTENANCE_LCL group SEE ALso For more information about changing the security model
218. n number Station number 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway No setting is required 1 If the network address overlaps with the network address of the existing environment you can use an address other than 172 16 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 47 You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 172 16 13 64 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server F Validate settings upon exit Figure B3 3 3 14 Example of IP Address Setting Vnet 4 After the setting is complete click OK You do not need to restart the computer IP Address for VnetiPOpen This setting is not required when Vnet IP is used together with Ethernet 1 Inthe Network Connections window right click the VnetIPOpen icon and select Proper ties The VnetIPOpen Properties dialog box appears 2 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click the Properties The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties dialog box appears 3 Select Use the following IP address and specify the following valu
219. nce acknowledge the analysis results in Cross Reference Analyzer and perform downloading to SCS E Notes on Online Change Download after Upgrading SENG In R2 02 the problem that the FB for which you have specified a minus value for a label in a CASE statement does not run properly 1 has been fixed Because of this the behavior of online change downloading after you have upgraded the SENG to R2 02 will be as follows After you have upgraded the SENG to R2 02 if you perform a build for a project created in a version before R2 02 and execute online change downloading all the FBs containing any CASE statement in the ST language will be downloaded 2 even if no changes have been made to the logic Once you rebuild a project of a version earlier than R2 02 on a R2 02 sys tem and execute online change downloading FBs with no logic change will not be downloa ded in the subsequent online change downloading You can use the Database Validity Check Tool as necessary to find out which FBs will be downloaded before you execute online change downloading In a revision before R2 02 FBs containing any CASE statement in which a minus value is specified for a label do not run correctly so they can be spotted and removed in the system test Therefore no such FBs should exist in a project However if such FBs do exist the FBs may start to run normally after downloading To avoid such unexpected change in behavior you should check the project to s
220. nder window appears 3 Click Tools displayed at the top The Tools and Settings window appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 19 4 Click Options The Options window appears sE Windows Defender When Windows Defender is on all users are alerted if spyware or other potentially unwanted software attempts to run or install itself on the computer Windows Defender will check for new definitions regularly scan the computer and automatically remove harmful software detected by ascan F Allow everyone to use Windows Defender Allow users who do not have administrative rights to scan the computer choose actions to F apply to potentially unwanted software and review all Windows Defender activities E Figure B3 2 2 6 Options 5 Clear the check box for Use Windows Defender and click Save A confirmation dialog box appears 6 Click Close Turning Off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor If Tools of Windows Defender is grayed out you can turn off Windows Defender in Local Group Policy Editor Follow these steps to turn off Windows Defender 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 Click the Start button of Windows and enter gpedit msc in the Program and file search box The Local Group Policy Editor window appears 3 Select Computer Configuration gt Administrative Templates gt Windows Components gt Windows Defender
221. ndows authentication which is a user authentication mode available with the access control operation history management function you need to perform the fol lowing tasks e When you have changed from Standalone management to Domain Combination man agement or vice versa you need to set up the users who uses SENG again If you cre ated a new Windows user of SENG register the user in the Engineers Account Builder EE oe For more information about the tasks on the domain controller and how to add computers to a domain refer to B2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment on page B2 1 For more information about the explanation of how to register engineers refer to m Registering an Engineer s Account in 16 2 3 Registering Engineers in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings gt C8 4 E User Who Changes IT Security Settings Table C8 1 1 1 Groups to Which the User Who Changes IT Security Settings Belongs Currently applied se Security model and user management type to be applied curity model and user Standard model management type Legacy model Standalone type Domain Combination type Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE Administrators and PSF_MAINTENANCE NANCE of the domain 1 Standalone Of the local computer Administrators and PSF_MAINTE type NANCE of the local computer 1 2 Standard mod
222. ne Download on page C4 6 Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 Procedure D Setting Definition Items for New Features and Offline Download on page C4 8 Support for Vnet IP For engineering the SCS connected with Vnet IP follow the Procedure C on SENG in R1 02 or later Optical ESB Bus Repeater For extending the ESB bus using an Optical ESB Bus Repeater follow the Procedure D on SENG in R1 02 or later Set the parameters from the SCS tab on the SCS Constants Builder Using the New FBs in the R1 02 Before using the new FBs in the R1 02 follow the Procedure C on SENG in R1 02 or later Outputting Process Alarm Messages when AOF is Released From the SCS Constants Builder window you can specify to or not to output the suppressed process alarm messages when the AOF is released This setting is applicable when the ProSafe RS is integrated with CENTUM Follow the Procedure D on SENG in R1 02 or later Plant Hierarchy For specifying Plant Hierarchy to the tag data operated and monitored on HIS when the Pro Safe RS is integrated with CENTUM follow the Procedure B on SENG in R1 02 or later Expansion of Alarm Processing Levels When the ProSafe RS is integrated with CENTUM you can set the Alarm Processing Levels 5 to 16 to the tag data operated and monitored on HIS Follow the Procedure D on SENG in R1 02 or later For more information
223. net IP open communication Figure B3 3 3 3 Vnet IP and Ethernet are Installed On a computer installed with a Vnet IP interface card follow these steps to disable the Vnet IP Open communication driver 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Security gt Device Manager TIP In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 environment select Control Panel gt System and Maintenance gt System gt Device Manager 3 On Device Manager unfold Network adapters 4 Select Vnet IP Open Communication Driver BUS2 and then click the Disable button on the toolbar IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt F File Action View Help o9 n S be e PSR Disable button a g HIS0464 b gi Computer b Disk drives gt MY Display adapters b 3 DVD CD ROM drives b Floppy disk drives b Floppy drive controllers gt os Human Interface Devices gt ca IDE ATA ATA I controllers gt S Keyboards p A Mice and other pointing devices b E Monitors EP Network adapters AP Broadcom NetXtreme 57xx Gigabit Controller xP Vnet IP Open Communication Driver BUS2 Yokogawa Vnet Adapter gt Portable Devices gt I Ports COM amp LPT gt Processors gt x Sound video and game controllers b gill System devices gt Universal Serial Bus controllers
224. ng Information Create the necessary users and groups in Local PC Grants access permissions for files and folders of each product Grants access permissions for the registry used by each product Sets firewall policies Sets the rights required to run products jing Sets the LAN Manager authentication level to only NTLMv2 Hides the user name of the last logon user Figure B3 5 2 4 Confirm Setting Information Page IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TIP TIP TIP SEE ALSO lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 65 If the settings specified are different from the default values of the security model a warning dialog box ap pears To apply the current settings click Yes If you click No you will return to the Select Setting Items page 7 Confirm the settings and click Next e If this tool was used in the past to configure security settings without opening the Select Setting Items page the last configured IT security settings are applied If these settings and the default settings of the selected security model do not match a warning dialog box appears To apply the current settings click Yes If you click No you will return to the IT Security Settings page When the setup is complete the Setup Completed page appears If there is any setting items that have failed the failed items are displayed 8 Select the Restart now
225. ng licenses to license assigned stations in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E Configure Function Specific Settings Configure the settings specific to the functions that run on the SENG For more information about configuring the settings specific to each function of SENG refer to B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG on page B4 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 2 When the Computer Used is Not the Same gt C7 6 C7 2 When the Computer Used is Not the Same This section describes the procedure for reinstallation on a different computer when the com puter installed with the ProSafe RS software can no longer be used due to damage or other reasons Reinstallation for a License Assigned Station This section describes the reinstallation procedure for a license assigned station The procedure is the same as that for a new setup of SENG except that you need to restore the data that were backed up Start Reinstallation Set Up the Hardware Set Up Windows Set Up the Network Install Configure IT Security Settings Restore Backed Up Data Redistribute Licenses from License Management Station Create User Accounts Configure Windows Environment Settings for Each User Set Up UPS Service Configure Function Specific Settings ee Set Up for Connection with Other Systems Fi
226. nge the IT security settings This section describes the information and procedures on how to connect various products af ter installation IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA products gt D1 1 D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA products This section describes the settings that are required to connect YOKOGAWA products For each connection case an integration code is assigned You must perform the tasks that are required for the corresponding integration code of your connection case A IMPORTANT e Ensure that the security model and the user management type of the products that you are connecting are the same e Ifthe Strengthened model is applied to the products that you want to connect contact YOKOGAWA E i ALSO ak lil Vaii about security models user management types users and groups and security set ings refer to 1 Overview in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E E integration code The format of the integration code is as follows Package code 1 Package code 2 Integration type Revision number The following table describes the elements of an integration code Table D1 1 Integration code elements Element Description Package code The code that is assigned to a software package that can be installed independ ently on a computer First package code is the package code of product 1 and Second package code is the package code of product 2
227. nges in Multi Language Editor Specifications Font and Font Color are Set for Each Project In revisions earlier than R2 02 the font and font color shown in the function block diagram FBD window of Multi Language Editor are retained for each user of the computer From R2 02 the font and font color settings for FBD windows are retained for each project When a project is first opened in R2 02 the font and font color settings used by the user who opened the project will be retained in the project FBD Guidelines are Set for Each Project In revisions earlier than R2 02 the guideline setting for the FBD window of Multi Language Editor is retained for each computer From R2 02 the guideline setting is retained for each project The guideline setting when the project is first opened in R2 02 will be retained in the project IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 22 Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 In this section the cautionary notes for upgrading from R2 02 to R2 03 are explained Before you upgrade also read the cautionary notes for the previous revisions issued after the soft ware version currently installed on your computer A IMPORTANT e Inthe case of system configuration integrating ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP it is possi ble to perform operation and monitoring of the newly added features of ProSafe RS R2 03 correctly by using CENTUM VP or R4 02 or later versions e
228. nii G B3 8 B3 2 2 Configuring on Windows ViSta eeeeceeeeeeeeeeee ster eeeeeeeteeeeeee B3 15 B3 2 3 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 R2 B3 21 B3 2 4 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 B3 27 B3 3 Configuring Network SettingS ccccscseccsssenneesseeeneeseeeeeeenseceeeeenees B3 32 B3 3 1 Installing the Control Bus Driver B3 33 B3 3 2 Installing the Vnet IP Open Communication Driver 0 B3 35 B3 3 3 Configuring Windows Network SettingS 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeee B3 37 B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS SOftWAre ccccesesseccessseeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeneees B3 54 B3 5 Configuring IT Security SettingS ccceceeessseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeneeenees B3 58 B3 5 1 IT Security TOO 3 cszaee vyagsecntyane cde sensteeevevpadeecebanguesdeesntaaeeeeevas B3 59 B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tol sconsecicssiionennnieiienaa B3 62 B3 6 Distributing and Accepting LiCENSeS cceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeens B3 67 B3 7 Creating User ACCOUNHS cccccceceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneeseeeeseeeeeesessneeseeeeseeeees B3 68 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 TocB 2 B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied eissernir iaeia B3 69 B3 7 2 When the Legacy Model of Security Settings are Applied B3 71 B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User B3 72 B3 8 1 Configuring ON WIN
229. nish Reinstallation Figure C7 2 1 Flow of Reinstallation for a License Assigned Station IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 2 When the Computer Used is Not the Same gt C7 7 A IMPORTANT For the station name of the new computer specify the same name as that set on the previous computer SEE ALso For more information about the procedures for a new setup of SENG refer to B3 Setting Up the SENG on page B3 1 B4 Configuring Function Specific Settings on SENG on page B4 1 D1 Connecting YOKOGAWA products on page D1 1 Restore the Backed Up Data Restore the backed up data on the new computer ALso For more information about the backed up data refer to C3 Backing Up the System on page C3 1 E Reinstallation for the License Management Station The license management station can be a computer installed with the ProSafe RS software or a computer dedicated to license management You need to perform reinstallation according to the type of the license management station The procedure is the same as that for a new setup except that the following tasks are in volved e Back up license projects e Restore the backed up data e Restore the license projects e Redistribute licenses to the license assigned stations IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 2 When the Computer Used is Not the Same gt C7 8 Start Reinstallation Back Up License
230. nization in Windows Domain Environment When using ProSafe RS in a Windows domain environment synchronize the time on the do main controller with the time on computers used in the ProSafe RS system F For more information about setting up time synchronization in a Windows domain environment refer to B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment on page B2 19 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 6 A2 2 2 Setup Procedure for SENG The following figure shows the setup procedure for SENG Start Set up the hardware Set up Windows Set up the network Install ProSafe RS software Install other YOKOGAWA Yes products Install software of other No YOKOGAWA products 1 lt Configure IT security settings Distribute and accept licenses Create user accounts Set up Windows environment for each user Set up the UPS Configure function specific settings other systems Set up for connection with End 1 You may install other products later If you install later you need to configure IT security settings again Figure A2 2 2 1 Setup Procedure for SENG You can jump to the explanation of each task that appears in the flowchart from the reference link that is provided in the following subsections E Set Up the Hardware S
231. nly ProSafe RS This section describes how to implement time synchronization in a system consisting of only ProSafe RS for the following cases e Vnet Not synchronize to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Vnet IP Synchronize to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC Vnet IP Not synchronize to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC E For V net Not Synchronize to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC Configure a station connected to the V net domain as the SNTP server Times on the comput ers within the V net domain are synchronized using the V net time synchronization function Time synchronization of the entire system is achieved by synchronizing the time on the do main controller to the SNTP server TIP When a station is used as the SNTP server the system time is not synchronized to UTC but to the time on the hardware of the SNTP server e On the computers connected on V net do not use the Windows W32Time service to per form time synchronization If used times on the computers are synchronized to the time on the domain controller and synchronization with the SNTP server is prevented e On the domain controller use the Windows W32Time service to synchronize its time with the SNTP server Domain Controller Ethernet Synchronize V net A Time Master Computer erver SENG etc V net time synchronization V net SCS Figure
232. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn B1 1 B2 Setting Up the Windows Domain Environment cccccseseeeeeeees B2 1 B2 1 Overview of Setting Up the Domain Environment e eeeeeees B2 2 B2 2 Configuring the Domain Controller Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 esr sas seee Ee eE EAEE aeaee SE OEE AREE ERE B2 3 B2 3 Configuring Security Settings for the Domain Controller 0008 B2 5 B2 4 Creating Domain USCIS ciiccicssccicccccecsecccssennectcecsecsredsacesseesctacecesneesteeeveetenes B2 9 B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain c ecccssseeeneseseeeeenneeeeeenes B2 13 B2 6 Setting Up Redundant Domain Controllers cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeees B2 18 B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment aaa aati paia aapon susie saddens sasedsv ances sccesevsebussdaee savedtedssees cone sshie da cveessadeueessseedevecs B2 19 B2 7 1 Implementing Time Synchronization in a System Consisting of Only ProSafe RS nahii aaaeaii i aeiete inns B2 20 B2 7 2 Implementing Time Synchronization When Integrated with CENTUM a AE A E E E E B2 23 B3 Setting Up the SENG avcesacssicssresencsnncctsnasasonacasenuneceadscssannnasaeescaastncese B3 1 B3 1 Setting Up the Hardwarre ccceeccssssenseeseseenseeeeeseenseeesseceeseeesseanseeeeseees B3 2 B3 2 Setting Up Wind OwsS wacciccccccccccccccccceccceccsccececeescececveccsteesceassceeceeeesceeeestecseees B3 7 B3 2 1 Configuring ON Windows Tososcssoici
233. nput Processing at Fault or Input Value at Fault are changed online simultaneously the input value will conform to the changed settings of Input Pro cessing at Fault and Input Value at Fault Behavior of Output Modules At the time of online change the data status of all channels of the target module be come BAD and the diagnostic information message IOM Fail appears The output val ues on all channels change to 0 if the target module is a discrete output module and change to the tight shut output values 1 if the target module is an analog output mod ule If on demand HART communication with PRM is performed the HART communication is discontinued during the IOM Fail status On completion of online change download the data status of all channels become GOOD while the output values still remain O with a discrete output module or remain the tight shut output values with an analog output module A diagnostic information message indicating that the output module has recovered to normal is output IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 gt App 4 21 e For dual redundantly configured output modules the odd numbered module takes the control right e Ifthe user performs the output enable operation outputs of the application logic are out put from the output module 1 A tight shut output value can be set for each channel using the I O Parameter Builder E Cha
234. nt to Standard Model Domain Combination Management on a File Server For this change you need to save the security settings after the file server computer joined a domain because the security settings are changed by joining the domain Follow these steps to make the change 1 Logon as an administrative user who belongs to the Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE groups of the local computer 2 Start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium Click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool Restore the initial security settings saved while the computer is not a member of a do main before you fist time used the IT Security Tool to setup security 5 After restarting add the computer to the domain Log on as the same administrative user you previously logged on in step 1 Start the installation menu and click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use The IT Security Tool starts 8 Click Save 9 Save the security settings as the initial settings right after it joined a domain 10 On the IT Security Tool s menu click Setup 11 Select the security model and user management type for the file server and run the set up 12 After applying the security settings restart the computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings gt C8 7 When Changing from Standard Model Domain Combination Managemen
235. nter Solve Show icon and notifications PC issues 3 important messages 4 total messages QE Network Tai caters E Show icon and notifications Unidentified network No network access O Volume Speakers 66 Show icon and notifications LicenseAgent TaskTray paje Only show notifications Turn system icons on or off Restore default icon behaviors Always show all icons and notifications on the taskbar Figure B3 8 1 1 Notification Area Icons Window 3 For License Agent TaskTray select Show icon and notifications and click OK E Display Properties The procedure for setting the display properties is explained as follows 1 Log on using the user account for which to set display properties 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Personalization gt Desktop Background The Desktop Background window appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 74 o mam Cee Al Control Panelitems Personalization Desktop Background gt Search Control Panel P Choose your desktop background Click a picture to make it your desktop background or select more than one picture to create a slide show Picture location Solid Colors Zi Browse wa More Save changes Figure B3 8 1 2 Desktop Background Window 3 Se
236. ntrol Panel window The Notification Area Icons window appears Select which icons and notifications appear on the taskbar F you choose to hide icons and notifications you won t be notified about changes or updates To view hidden icons at any time click the arrow next to the notification area on the taskbar Icons Behaviors Show icon and notifications 3 Action Center Solve PC issues 3 im messages Show icon and notifications Show icon and notifications License Agent LicenseAgent TaskTray e Agent Only show notifications Turn system icons on or off Restore default icon behaviors Always show all icons and notifications on the taskbar Figure B3 8 3 1 Notification Area Icons Window 3 For License Agent TaskTray select Show icon and notifications and click OK E Display Properties The procedure for setting the display properties is explained as follows 1 Log on using the user account for which to set display properties 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization gt Per sonalization gt Desktop Background The Desktop Background window appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 79 E Desktop Background oj x GO E v eree otter F pt i sexcowaros Choose your desktop background Click a pict
237. nu appears 3 Click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use The IT Security Tool starts IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server gt B5 5 IT Security Tool Figure B5 1 1 IT Security Tool Menu 4 Save the security settings TIP If the file server is a member of a domain when restoring the initial security settings on the file server the initial data should have two types either the initial data for a standalone computer or the initial data for a member of domain If you do not have the initial data for a standalone file server computer you need to remove the file server from the domain temporarily and then save the security settings as the initial data for the standalone comput er SEE ALso For more information about the subsequent operations of the IT Security Tool refer to C8 2 1 Procedure for SENG PC on page C8 9 E Procedure 4 Configure the IT Security Settings on the File Server 1 From the IT Security Tool Menu click Setup A confirmation dialog box appears 2 Ifyou have saved the above mentioned initial security setting data click OK TIP If you have not saved the initial security setting data click Cancel to return to the tool s menu and save the security settings The Select Security Model page appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 3
238. o observe the safety precautions and instructions when operating the Product If the Product is used in a manner not specified in the User s Manuals the protection pro vided by the Product may be impaired If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the Product or for the Product itself please install it externally Use only spare parts that are approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consum ables of the Product Do not use the Product and its accessories such as power cords on devices that are not approved by YOKOGAWA Do not use the Product and its accessories for any purpose other than those intended by YOKOGAWA Modification of the Product is strictly prohibited The following symbols are used in the Product and User s Manuals to indicate the accom panying safety precautions AN Indicates that caution is required for operation This symbol is labeled on the Prod uct to refer the user to the User s Manuals for necessary actions or behaviors in order to protect the operator and the equipment against dangers such as electric shock In the User s Manuals you will find the precautions necessary to prevent physical injury or death which may be caused by accidents such as electric shock resulting from operational mistakes Identifies a protective conductor terminal Before using the Product you must ground the protective conductor terminal to avoid electric shock Identifies a functional
239. o the customer s security poli cy YOKOGAWA recommends to apply security patches to ProSafe RS systems It is rec ommended to apply all required security patches before the system goes into operation and also apply security patches that are released after the system went into operation as promptly as possible YOKOGAWA offers security patch application services Contact YOKOGAWA Service for more information About NET Framework and MDAC NET Framework Version 3 5 SP1 ProSafe RS supports version 3 5 SP1 When the ProSafe RS software is installed NET Framework is automatically installed However NET Framework Version 3 5 SP1 included in the ProSafe RS software medi um will not be installed automatically if a newer version has already been installed in the computer to avoid downgrading of NET Framework IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 e MDAC Windows DAC ProSafe RS supports MDAC version 2 8 SP1 or later and Windows DAC 6 0 or later It is not installed when the ProSafe RS software is installed because Windows DAC 6 0 or later version with advanced MDAC is provided in Windows Vista and later OS e MSXML ProSafe RS supports version 4 0 SP3 lt A3 2 Software Requirements gt A3 4 MSXML is automatically installed during installation of the ProSafe RS software However MSXML Version 4 0 SP3 included in the ProSafe RS software medium will not be installed automatically if a newer version has already be
240. oad the Diagnostic Information Window should be closed If the window is not closed during offline download it is necessary to click Update button when the SCS start action is completed so as to display the diagnostic information properly Cautionary Notes for Executing Build after Upgrading SENG If a user defined FU satisfying the following conditions is created by an SENG in an earlier version than R1 01 30 and the SENG is upgraded to R1 01 30 or later the first Build execu tion after the upgrade will cause a Build Error message This is because the specification change made in the R1 01 30 to prevent the creation of the user defined FUs satisfied the following conditions Conditions that Cause a Build Error e FB s is used in a user defined FU e Variable s of global attributes is used in a user defined FU Workaround If an FB or global variable s is used in a user defined FU change the user defined FU to a user defined FB An offline download is required after this change E Notes on Running Cross Reference Analyzer after Upgrading SENG If a user defined FU satisfying the following condition is created by an SENG in an earlier ver sion than R1 01 30 and the SENG is upgraded to R1 01 30 or later the message Instruction Modified appears at the execution of Cross Reference Analyzer after the initial Build execu tion Condition for an Instruction Modified Notification If local variable s is used in
241. odel is selected on an SENG PC running the CHS2200 SOE OPC Interface Package If the standard model of security settings is applied by the IT Securi ty Tool after installation of ProSafe RS access to DCOM will be set By this setting only users belonging to ProSafe RS user groups can access the SOE OPC interface E Setting when Using Packages Performing OPC Communication with SENG PC When you are using packages OPC clients that perform OPC communication with SENG PC OPC servers you must make the setting explained here Inthe Case of Standalone Management or When Combination Management is Applied on Some Computers Perform the following procedure on an SENG PC performing OPC communication 1 Create a program user of the OPC client package Set the same user name and pass word as those on the client computer 2 Make the created program user belong to the PSF_OPC user group Inthe Case of Domain Management or When Combination Management is Applied on All Computers e In the case of package that can join the domain 1 Make acomputer that runs the OPC client package join the domain 2 Register the package program user to the domain and make it belong to the PSF_OPC user group e Inthe case of package that cannot join the domain Perform the following procedure on the SENG PC performing OPC communication 1 Create a program user of the OPC client package Set the same user name and password as those on the computer running the pa
242. omputer that serves only as a file server or a domain controller computer start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium and click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool The rest of steps are the same as the procedure for an SENG PC EE ALso For more information about how to start the installation menu refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File Password gt C8 17 C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File Password You can change the password encryption key for security setting files used by the IT Securi ty Tool IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File Password gt C8 18 C8 4 1 Procedures for SENG PC This section describes the procedure for changing the password encryption key for security setting files on an SENG PC E Changing Procedure 1 Log on as a member of the PSF_MAINTENANCE group or as an administrative user when the Legacy model is applied and click YOKOGAWA Security gt IT Security Tool from the Start menu The IT Security Tool starts 2 Click Change Password Encryption Key The Specify backup file of security page appears Specify backup file of security Apply Change to Single File Multiple Files Source 6 Destination 6
243. on Windows 7 as an instance A IMPORTANT When the Vnet IP interface card is mounted always install the Vnet IP open communication driver even if Vnet IP open communication is not used E Precautions at Installation TIP Before installing the Vnet IP open communication driver be sure to install a Vnet IP inter face card in the computer You cannot install the driver if the card is not installed If you want to change the slot in which a Vnet IP interface card is mounted uninstall the Vnet IP open communication driver and control bus driver and then change the slot After changing the slot install the drivers again When removing a Vnet IP interface card from a computer after the Vnet IP open commu nication driver is installed uninstall the driver before you remove the card from the slot When installing the Vnet IP open communication driver restarting the computer is basically not required However restart the computer if a dialog box indicating completion of the installation restarting re quired is displayed When Ethernet is also used configure network settings after you install the Vnet IP open communication driver and disable the driver When Ethernet is not used configure network settings after you install the Vnet IP open communication driver E Installation Procedure Log on as an administrative user Insert the ProSafe RS software medium into the drive e If the AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run La
244. on will mainly use the user interfaces of Windows 7 However for the procedures typical for each operating system the explanation will use the user interfaces of each system and describe the procedure separately IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 Overview of Setup Tasks gt A2 1 A2 Overview of Setup Tasks This section describes the workflows of setup tasks and provides the information you should understand before you set up individual stations IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 1 Before You Set Up gt A2 2 A2 1 Before You Set Up This section describes the relationship between installation of ProSafe RS software and li censing for it E Installation and Licensing of Software Packages In order to use ProSafe RS software packages it is necessary to install the ProSafe RS soft ware on a computer and then grant licenses to the computer to enable the use of the software packages The tasks of installing the software packages on each computer are performed using a pro gram called an installer The tasks of giving licenses are executed using software called Li cense Manager License Manager is automatically installed when the ProSafe RS software is installed on a computer Among computers installed with License Manager the computer that is given the role of man aging licenses of each computer in the system is called the license management station The license management station distribute
245. ons as compatibility information enabling users to confirm the specifications in earlier versions When you upgrade ProSafe RS install only the software of the release number you want to use However for the required procedures after the installation read the cautionary notes for upgrading for all release numbers between the release number of the software currently in stalled on your computer and the release number of the software you want to use Information on the following upgrading is provided e Upgrading the software with a release number older than R1 01 30 to R1 01 30 e Upgrading the software of R1 01 30 to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 e Upgrading the software of R1 01 30 R1 01 40 R1 01 50 to R1 02 e Upgrading the software of R1 02 to R1 03 e Upgrading the software of R1 03 to R2 01 e Upgrading the software of R2 01 to R2 02 e Upgrading the software of R2 02 to R2 03 e Upgrading the software of R2 03 to R3 01 e Upgrading the software of R3 01 to R3 02 e Upgrading the software of R3 02 00 to R3 02 10 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 1 Upgrading to R1 01 30 gt App 4 2 Appendix 4 1 Upgrading to R1 01 30 The cautionary notes for upgrading the ProSafe RS from an earlier version to R1 01 30 will be explained below A IMPORTANT When subsystem communication or SYS_SEC_CTL FB are applied while ProSafe RS R1 01 30 is integrated with CS 3000 the release number of CS 3000 software must be R3 07 or later
246. operating systems related service packs and the Microsoft security patches refer to the information provided by Microsoft For more information about Microsoft security patches refer to Microsoft Security Update Policy TI 33Y01B30 02E For more information about the procedure for distributing and activating the licenses on the stations refer to 1 Overview of license management in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E For more information about system security refer to 1 Overview in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E E Structure of This Document This document consists of the following parts e Part A Overview This part describes how to read this document various types of ProSafe RS setup tasks along with their workflows and hardware and software requirements e Part B New Setup This part explains the procedures for setting up each station e Part C Maintenance This part describes maintenance tasks that are required after the stations have been set up and went into operation e Part D Connection with Other Products This part describes the required settings when connecting ProSafe RS with other YOKO GAWA products such as CENTUM VP PRM and Exaquantum E Regarding Explanation of Setup Procedures The procedure for setting up Windows and device drivers vary with the Windows operating systems For the procedure that are common to all the operating systems that are supported the explanati
247. or modified install the ProSafe RS software R3 02 or later and open the existing SCS project When you open a password protected SCS project the security of the password is strength ened SEE ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 9 Upgrading to Version R3 02 00 gt App 4 37 Appendix 4 9 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading E Procedure for Using New and Modified Features After the SENG software has been upgraded to R3 02 00 some of the features added or modified in R3 02 00 require performing further tasks such as offline downloading to SCS before they can be used In the following the steps are explained for each feature rer For more information about Procedure B Procedure C and Procedure D that appear in this section re fer to Procedure B Master Database Offline Download on page C4 6 Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 Procedure D Setting Definition Items for New Features and Offline Download on page C4 8 Ethernet Communication Module ALE111 and Modbus TCP Slave Communication To use the Ethernet communication module ALE111 newly supported in R3 02 to perform Modbus slave communication over the Modbus TCP protocol you need to perform Proce dure C on an SENG
248. orts this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server F Validate settings upon exit Figure B3 3 3 16 Example of IP Address Setting Ethernet 4 After the setting is complete click OK You do not need to restart the computer E Procedure 4 Configure Bindings You need to configure network bindings because ProSafe RS uses multiple network devices combination of Ethernet communication and control bus communication or combination of Vnet IP open communication and control bus communication Configure the network bindings according to the network configuration of the system If multiple net work cards are installed a card that is installed later has higher priority Be cause of this you need to change the binding settings so that the following priority order is ensured e Ethernet has higher priority than Vnet e If Vnet IP open communication is used VnetIPOpen has higher priority than Vnet e If both Vnet IP open communication and Ethernet are used the priority shall be in this or der Ethernet VnetIPOpen and then V net where Ethernet is the highest If the system uses Ethernet and Vnet follow these steps 1 From the Advanced menu on t
249. ot be opened by an SENG in an earlier revision e The library created or opened by a new revision of SENG cannot be added to the SCS project of an earlier revision IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 EE ALSO SEE ALSO lt C4 2 Settings after Upgrading ProSafe RS Software gt C4 8 For more information about the procedures for transferring the existing SCS project using Import Export func tions refer to 2 20 Import Export Function in Engineering Guide IM 32Q01C10 31E For more information about the procedures for migrating the existing SCS project using the Import Export functions refer to a Confirming a Regenerated Project in 2 20 4 Data Transfer Procedure During SCS Project Regener ation in Engineering Guide IM 32Q01C10 31E For more information about offline downloading refer to 9 1 Offline Download in Engineering Reference IM 32Q04B10 31E Procedure D Setting Definition Items for New Features and Offline Download Some new features require this procedure Install the new revision of SENG software set the definition items for the new features and offline download the project The procedure is as follows 1 Using SCS Manager open the old revision project 2 Set the definition items for the new features The items to be set are described in the section of upgrading procedures for each soft ware release number 3 Run Build Then use Integrity Analyzer
250. ot use the Setting IT Security File server domain controller use button on the installation menu to start the IT Security Tool SEE ALso For more information about how to create the project folder on the file server refer to mg Procedure 6 Create the Project Folder on the File Server and Start the Operation on page B5 7 For more information about new setup of SENG refer to B3 Setting Up the SENG on page B3 1 For more information about the shared folder settings refer to mg Procedure 2 Create and Set Up the Shared Folders on page B5 3 For more information about creating accounts for users who access the project database refer to m Procedure 5 Create Accounts on the File Server for Users who Access Project Data on page B5 7 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 3 Setting Up the Computer that Serves as Both File Server and License Management Station gt B5 9 B5 3 Setting Up the Computer that Serves as Both File Server and License Management Station This section describes the setup required for the computer that serves as both a file server and a license management station E Setup Procedure 1 Install the license management software 2 On the dialog box that appears on completion of the installation select No want to in stall other software products and click Finish Configure the shared folder settings required for a file server Start the IT Security Tool f
251. ounded via a 1 M ohm resistor and wear wrist strap Keep static chargeable plastic materials away from the parts e Never touch the parts with bare hands without using a wrist strap and a conductive sheet Conductive sheet Grounding resistance Wrist strap When working with a product with battery on Connect the wrist strap to the grounding terminal or a conductive sheet set the battery ON OFF unpainted part of the frame grounded switch to the OFF position or remove the battery Figure Appendix 3 1 Using a Wrist Strap The wrist strap and conductive sheet are available from YOKOGAWA sales agents IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 Compatibility between Revisions and Cautionary Notes for Upgrading gt App 4 1 Appendix 4 Compatibility between Revisions and Cautionary Notes for Upgrading A IMPORTANT e Itis necessary to contact Yokogawa service agent before performing any operation ex plained in this chapter e Be sure to take a backup of the whole project before upgrading ProSafe RS This section provides the compatibility information for earlier versions of ProSafe RS software released in the past and the cautionary notes for upgrading that were published at the time of each release The purpose of this section is to enable users to confirm the procedures for us ing the new features supported in each release This section provides important descriptions of SCS specificati
252. oup Log on to the computer while it is connected to the domain Until you reset the security settings to the initial status log on the computer while it is standalone Subsequently when you log on the computer to apply security settings the computer should be connected to the domain E User Who Changes IT Security Settings on the Domain Controller When changing the IT security settings on the domain controller computer log on the comput er as a user who belongs to the Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTENANCE groups of the do main E Changing Procedure The following three procedures are described here Basic procedure Procedure to change from Standard model Standalone management to Standard model Domain Combination management on a file server Procedure to change from Standard model Domain Combination management to Stand ard model Standalone management on a file server Basic Procedure for Changing Security Settings 1 2 Log on as the user who changes the security settings Start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium and click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool Click Restore Select a file that the previous security settings are saved prior to running the IT Security Setting Tool so as to restore the securities IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 SEE ALSO lt C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings gt C8 6 For a file
253. pServer cmd The Command Prompt window appears and displays Enable NTP Server y n quit TIP If the IT security settings have been configured to apply software restriction policies run the command prompt cmd exe as the administrator and then run the command from the command prompt window 2 Enter y and then press the Enter key IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment gt B2 23 B2 7 2 Implementing Time Synchronization When Integrated with CENTUM When the system is integrated with CENTUM set up time synchronization by following the ex planation provided in the manual of CENTUM If the system consists of multiple V net do mains or a mixture of Vnet IP domain and V net domain also follow the explanation in the manual of CENTUM RE For more information about how to set up time synchronization in Windows domain environment for a system integrated with CENTUM refer to B2 8 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment in CENTUM VP Installation IM 33K01C10 50E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 Setting Up the SENG gt B3 1 B3 Setting Up the SENG This section describes the tasks required for the new setup of SENG A IMPORTANT In a ProSafe RS system you need to decide on one computer for use as the license manage ment station The license management station can be set up on a computer
254. pare for setup Build the system in a domain__ Yes environment 1 Set up Windows domain environment No lt Set up SENG Set up stations 2 Set up a file server Set up the computer dedicated to license management Set up hardware SCS and devices for connection between domains The system is built in a domain environment Synchronize the time of stations No End 1 You may set up the domain environment at a later stage 2 Start by setting up the station that is to be used as the license management station Figure A2 2 1 1 Setup Procedure for a ProSafe RS System You can jump to the explanation of each task that appears in the flowchart from the reference link that is provided in the following subsections E Prepare for Setup Determine the required items for setting up a ProSafe RS system SEE ALso For more information about the items that must be determined before setting up a ProSafe RS system refer to B1 Preparing for the Setup on page B1 1 E Set Up the Windows Domain Environment When using ProSafe RS in a Windows domain environment set up the Windows domain en vironment You may also set up the Windows domain environment at a later stage SEE ALso For more information about setting up a Windows domain environment refer to B2 Setting Up the Windows
255. pgrade installation of the ProSafe RS software IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings gt C8 2 C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings This section describes how to change the security settings that have been applied Changing the security settings may do the following e Change the security model e Change the user management type e Change Individual setting items Ay IMPORTANT Before you change the IT security settings take a backup of the current security settings ALso For more information about the explanation of how to back up security settings refer to C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings on page C8 8 E Confirming the Applied Security Model and User Management Type You can confirm the currently applied security model and user management type EE RE el more information about how to check the currently set security model and user management type refer O m Find Out the Applied Security Model and User Management Type in 6 1 IT Security Tool in Pro Safe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings gt C8 3 C8 1 1 Procedures for SENG PC This section describes the procedures for changing the security settings on an SENG PC E Precautionary Notes Precautionary notes on changing IT security settings on a computer installed with ProSafe RS software are
256. pondence between Windows OS versions service packs and ProSafe RS release numbers Table A3 2 1 Correspondence between ProSafe RS Software Release Numbers and Windows OS Ver i sions ProSafe RS Windows 7 Windows Vis Windows Windows Windows Windows release num Professional ta Business Server 2008 Server 2008 Server 2003 Server 2003 ber Edition R2 Standard Standard Edi R2 Standard Standard Edi Edition R2 tion Edition tion 64 bits 32 bits 64 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits SP1 SP2 SP1 SP2 SP2 SP2 R3 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 1 No 1 R3 02 00 R3 02 10 R3 02 20 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Only allowed for use as a file server Before installing ProSafe RS make sure that a Windows OS version and service pack appro priate for the ProSafe RS software release number are installed on the computer A IMPORTANT On a Windows pre installed computer various Windows utilities and other software may have been installed in addition to the Windows OS These additional functions are not on ly unnecessary for SENG but also can disturb its operations To avoid disturbance to op erations reinstall the Windows OS This document describes the procedure for setting up a computer from the initial state where the OS has been installed Do not change the OS settings or add any functions other than the OS unless so described in the document It is assumed that security patches are applied according t
257. ppendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 35 Inter SCS transmission delay time is the time duration from the time an SCS on the trans mission side sends data to the time an SCS on the reception side receives the data If the inter SCS transmission delay timeout value exceeds the DLYT timeout value and the sta tus continue for the time specified by OUTT or longer a communication error occurs and a failsafe value is output The guidelines of timeout value settings are given in the following Setting of reception interval timeout value OUTT OUTT Scan frequency on the transmission or reception side whichever longer X 8 If OUTT is 3 seconds or less set 3 seconds Guidelines of setting value of transmission delay timeout value DLYT If the time synchronization method employed is V net time synchronization or Vnet IP time synchronization set 3 seconds for DLYT In the case of IRIG B time synchronization determine DLYT as follows DLYT Scan frequency on transmission side Scan frequency on the reception side Delay addition Time gap addition Delay addition 100 ms Time gap addition Determine the setting value so that erroneous trips do not occur due to time gap If DLYT is 3 seconds or less set 3 seconds If O seconds are set for DLYT checking of transmission delay by DLYT is bypassed IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 9 Upgrading to Version R3 02 00 gt App 4 36 Append
258. pported only in CENTUM VP R4 02 and later versions If you plan to manage ProSafe RS computers in Windows domain environment the Win dows domain environment settings should be performed before performing the installa tion E Software Revisions Software revision information in release R2 02 is as follows Software Release R2 02 xx 1 e SENG software release number R2 02 xx 1 SCS system program release number R2 02 xx 1 1 xx varies in accordance with the last two digits of the release number for the software which will be released after R2 02 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program to perform Inter SCS safety communication with an SCS in R2 02 must be R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCSs must be in R1 02 or later Control Bus Drivers The control bus drivers installed on the computer should be upgraded to the version supplied at R2 02 E Procedures for Upgrading In order to use the features added or modified in R2 02 install the R2 02 or later software and open the existing SCS Project SEE ALso For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 6 Upgrading to R2 02 gt App 4 1 8 Appendix 4 6 1 Cautionary Not
259. ption data of the given inter SCS safety communication for the safety purpose e In both cases set the value of OUTT as the DLYT value if OUTT is smaller than DLYT e The timeout value is used for calculating system reaction time Precautions when Setting DLYT for Inter SCS Safety Communication Precautions to be followed when setting DLYT for inter SCS safety communication in software versions R2 03 51 or earlier are given below e If IRIG B time synchronization method is selected be sure to take the time gap due to failure of GPS and IRIG B interface into consideration e Inthe case of SCSs connected to Vnet IP time gap due to the SNTP server must be tak en into consideration e Unify the time synchronization method among SCSs that perform inter SCS safety com munication and determine the setting value such that erroneous trips do not occur due to time gap among SCSs If you set DLYT among SCSs over multiple domains the following points must also be taken into consideration e If V net time synchronization method is selected delay of up to 5 seconds in the first level of BCV V and 10 seconds in the second level may occur It is recommended to select IRIG B time synchronization if it is found that the gap is outside the allowable range e If domains are connected via a gateway for broadband connection it is recommended to synchronize V net time of each domain within the allowable range or select IRIG B time synchronization
260. puter Used is the Same gt C7 5 Install the ProSafe RS Software Install the ProSafe RS software For a computer dedicated to license management install the license management software For more information about installing the ProSafe RS software refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 For more information about how to install the license management software refer to B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management on page B6 1 Configure IT Security Settings Configure IT security settings in the same way as that for a new installation of the ProSafe RS software For more information about configuring the IT security settings refer to B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings on page B3 58 Restore the License Projects Start the License Manager and then check if license projects are displayed If not displayed you need to restore the license projects from the backup For more information about the procedure for restoring a license project refer to m Restoring a license project in another license management station in 3 6 Backing up and restoring a license project in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E Redistribute Licenses to License Assigned Stations Redistribute the licenses to the license assigned stations For more information about redistributing licenses from the license management station refer to 3 4 Redistributi
261. quired after installing the modules If required restart the computer and then continue the ProSafe RS installation For Windows Server 2008 R2 Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 is included in the OS but displayed when it is disabled If displayed interrupt the installation and enable this module The installation fails otherwise 6 Ifthe following dialog box appears restart the computer and log on again using the same user account IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software gt B3 56 YOKOGAWA products installe Administrative rights are granted to the logon user account The computer will now restart to apply the changes You must log on again using the same user account to continue the installation Figure B3 4 3 User Rights Setting Confirmation Dialog Box TIP Restarting the computer here grants the currently logged on user the rights required to perform the subse quent installation tasks Installation of the ProSafe RS software starts and the Welcome dialog box appears 7 Inthe Welcome dialog box click Next A dialog box for entering user information and the installation folder appears Register user information Enter the user name and organization User Name Organization YOKOGAWA Install to Browse to a folder that you want to install to C Program Files x86 ProSafe RS Figure B3 4 4 User Information Dialog Box TIP e I
262. r defined FU 4 Yes Yes Yes Adding deleting FB instances Yes No Adding deleting user defined FB 4 Yes No Adding a FB to be named the same In No stance as that of a deleted FB Changing logic Yes Yes 2 Yes 2 Creating deleting programs Changing pro No 5 gram names Creating deleting user defined Function No 5 Blocks Changing user defined Function Block names Creating deleting user defined Functions No 5 2 It is not allowed to increase decrease parameter values or change attributes They cause an error when the database is downloaded 3 An error occurs during downloading 4 When user defined FU FB are added they need to be tested Pre validated user defined FU FB do not need to be tested 5 Online change is only possible for local variables IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 7 Upgrading to R2 03 gt App 4 27 I O Module Information that is Changeable Online Table Appendix 4 7 2 2 I O Module Information Modification Online Change 1 Adding nodes No Deleting nodes No Changing parameters of nodes Yes Adding I O modules No Deleting I O modules No Changing redundant I O modules No Changing parameters of I O modules Yes Changing parameters of channels Yes Changing subsystem communication definitions Yes Defining link between a variable and an idle channel Yes Deleting link between a channel and a variable Yes C
263. r more information about the procedure to install the network driver in a computer refer to e B3 3 1 Installing the Control Bus Driver on page B3 33 e B3 3 2 Installing the Vnet IP Open Communication Driver on page B3 35 Installing the Vnet IP Interface Card After you have set the station address and action mode on the VI702 card follow these steps to install it in the computer 1 oa fF wD N Turn off the power of the computer For safety remove the power plug from the outlet Remove the cover of the main unit of the computer Unscrew the screws fixing the slot cover and remove the slot cover Insert the VI702 card in the corresponding slot and fix it to the slot Mount the cover back on the computer Connect both the BUS1 and BUS2 cables to VI702 and Layer 2 switch There is no need to turn off the power of the Layer 2 switch Connect the power cord of the computer back to the outlet and turn on the computer Make sure that the RDY lamp on VI702 is lit Write the station address on the label that comes with the VI702 card and paste it in the front or other easy to see location of the computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 7 B3 2 Setting Up Windows Before installing the ProSafe RS software you need to change the Windows settings on your computer to the recommended settings This configuration should be performed on the computer where the Windows O
264. r steps such as offline downloading to SCS before they can be used In the following the steps are explained for each feature New Station SSC57 To use the SSC57 station which is newly added in R3 02 10 you need to perform Procedure C on an SENG of R3 02 10 or later With SSC57 the Narrowband mode of Vnet IP Up stream gas flow rate calculation data buffering etc are available Calculation Functions and Time Synchronization Function Block To use the calculation functions LOGE and POWE and time synchronization function block SYS_SETTIME newly added in R3 02 10 you need to perform Procedure C on an SENG of R3 02 10 or later Change in the Specification of SCS Behavior at Both Bus Failure of Vnet IP To enable the revised SCS behavior at both bus failure of Vnet IP you need to perform Pro cedure D on an SENG of R3 02 10 or later 16 bit Modbus Master Support Mode To read and write data in 16 bit units in Modbus slave communication you need to perform Procedure D on an SENG of R3 02 10 or later IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 10 Upgrading to R3 02 10 gt App 4 41 Appendix 4 10 2 Compatibility with Earlier Revisions This section describes the specifications and precautions of SCS with a system program be fore R3 02 10 that are critical to safety as the information on compatibility Please read this section if you use SCS with a system program before R3 02 10 E Speci
265. rading revision of the software release num ber currently installed on the computer or earlier as well before starting the tasks of version upgrading to perform tasks required to upgrade each revision A IMPORTANT In the case of system configuration integrating ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP it is possible to perform operation and monitoring of the newly added features of ProSafe RS R3 01 correctly using CENTUM VP of R5 01 or later versions SEE ALso For more information about the operations related to the functions newly added in the ProSafe RS software version R3 01 when ProSafe RS is integrated with CENTUM VP or CS 3000 of R5 01 or earlier revisions refer to Appendix 1 Differences in limitations and specifications among software release numbers of CENTUM in Integration with CENTUM VP CS 3000 IM 32Q01E10 31E E Software Revisions The respective software release number of R3 01 is as follows Software Release R3 01 xx 1 e SENG software release number R3 01 xx 1 e SCS system program release number R3 01 xx 1 1 xx will be changed in accordance with the software revisions after the release of R3 01 00 Inter SCS Safety Communication The release number of the SCS system program of an SCS that performs Inter SCS safety communication with an SCS with system program version R2 0 must be of R1 01 30 or later If Vnet IP is used for route of the Inter SCS safety communication the system programs on the SCS
266. rameter a variable must be placed in the loop IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 2 Upgrading to R1 01 40 R1 01 50 gt App 4 7 OR OUT Figure Appendix 4 2 1 Example of Correct Loopback If a user defined FB ignoring this rule meets one of the following conditions an offline down load is required Condition 1 If the Generate symbols monitoring information for the user defined FB is OFF Condition 2 If the input of the loopback is the output from the FB B is FB in the following figure A b03 Figure Appendix 4 2 2 Example of Loopback Requiring an Offline Download Background With an SENG in an earlier version than R1 01 50 there are cases where no warning mes sage is output at a Build execution for a POU that does not follow the loopback rule With an SENG in R1 01 50 or later the following warning message is always output at a Build execution for a POU that does not follow the loopback rule WARNING Used of loop is not recommended If this message appears for a POU after the SENG is upgraded to R1 01 50 or later place a variable in the loop IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 3 Upgrading to R1 02 gt App 4 8 Appendix 4 3 Upgrading to R1 02 In this section the cautionary notes for upgrading from R1 01 30 R1 01 40 or R1 01 50 to R1 02 will be
267. ration Always trust software from Yokogawa Electric install Corporation You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can decide which device software is safe to install Figure C9 2 2 6 Windows Security Dialog Box for Network Adapter UpdateDriverForPlugAndPlayDevices failure PCIVEN_1281 amp DEV_0003 amp SUBSYS 00141281 0x2 Figure C9 2 2 7 Error Message for Network Adapter IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 11 Control Bus Driver 1 After restarting the computer click Control Bus Drier on the installation menu 2 Ifthe control bus driver can be deleted delete it and then restart the computer 3 Install the control bus driver again Vnet IP Open Communication Driver Start the installer again E Error Message is Displayed during Network Driver Installation 2 If an error message is displayed when you did not click Do not install in the Windows Securi ty dialog box for confirming installation of the network protocol or network adapter that ap pears during installation of a network driver perform the following tasks Control Bus Driver 1 After restarting the computer click Control Bus Driver on the installation menu 2 Perform either of the following operations e Ifthe control bus driver can be deleted delete it and then install the driver again e If the control bus driver cannot be delet
268. refer to C8 1 Changing the IT Security Settings on page C8 2 E Configuration on the Domain Controller il From the Windows Start menu select All programs gt Administrative Tools gt Active Di rectory Users and Computers The Active Directory Users and Computers window is displayed Right click the Computers folder and select New gt Computers The New Object Computer dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain gt B2 14 Figure B2 5 1 Active Directory Users and Computers Create new Computers 3 Enter the Computer Name and click OK Figure B2 5 2 New Object Computer Input of Computer Name 4 Confirm that the new computer has been added in the Computers folder IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 5 Adding Client Computers to the Domain gt B2 15 2 Figure B2 5 3 Active Directory Users and Computers confirmation of newly added computers Configuration on the domain controller is now finished Go on to the procedure for config uration on the client computer E Configuration on a Client Computer Windows 7 Follow these steps to add a Windows 7 computer to the domain 1 From the Start menu select Computer The Computer window appears 2 In the Computer window click System Properties The System window appears 3 Inthe System window click Change sett
269. roSafe RS select Yes want to set up IT security now and click Finish The IT Security Tool then starts e Ifyou install another YOKOGAWA product select No want to install other software products and click Finish to complete the installation Installation of YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS R3 01 00 was completed YOKOGAWA ProSafe RS has been successfully installed to your computer Do you want to set up IT security without installing other software products aa No I want to install other software products If you select No you must execute IT security tool after installation Figure B3 4 5 Installation Completed Dialog Box A IMPORTANT After you have installed other YOKOGAWA products be sure to run the IT Security Tool to configure IT security settings The IT security settings are configured for all the installed prod ucts at a time If you do not configure IT security settings the products will not function properly IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 58 B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings After installing the ProSafe RS software you need to configure settings to strengthen Win dows security Upon completion of the installation exit the installer with Yes want to set up IT security now selected The IT Security Tool starts allowing you to configure security settings This section describes how to configure security of th
270. rom the Start menu and configure IT security settings A IMPORTANT On a computer used as both a file server and a license management station do not use the Setting IT Security File server domain controller use button on the installation menu to start the IT Security Tool re For more information about installing only the license management software refer to B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management on page B6 1 For more information about the shared folder settings refer to m Procedure 2 Create and Set Up the Shared Folders on page B5 3 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management gt B6 1 B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management You can use a computer as the license management station by installing only the license management software on it This section describes the procedure for setting up the computer dedicated to license man agement E Items to be Prepared Have the following item at hand before installing the license management software ProSafe RS software medium Model CHSKM30 E Installation Procedure TIP TIP Follow these steps to install the license management software 1 Log on as an administrative user 2 Insert the ProSafe RS software medium into the drive e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appe
271. s SW4 for the Action Mode are all set to the off position on the VI702 Remove the cover of the computer Insert the VI702 in the corresponding slot and fix the card 5 6 7 Put back the cover of the computer 8 Do not connect the cable to either BUS1 or BUS2 9 Put back the power cord of the computer 1 0 Start the computer and then go to BIOS setting panel instead of starting Windows If the Windows started it is necessary to shutdown and switch off the computer and start the computer for BIOS setting again 11 Wait for about a minute after BIOS setting panel appears 12 Turn off the power of the computer For safety remove the power plug from the outlet 13 Remove the VI702 from the slot Fee For more information about how to display the BIOS setting window refer to The manual of the computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 3 Antistatic Precautions When Handling Hardware gt App 3 1 Appendix 3 Antistatic Precautions When Handling Hardware When doing maintenance work take the following precautions to avoid electrostatic problems e When storing or carrying parts for maintenance put them in an antistatic bag When shipped they are placed in an antistatic bag labeled with cautions against electrostatic problems e Wear a wrist strap with a 1M ohm grounding resistor then ground the wrist strap e When working on the bench place the parts on a conductive sheet gr
272. s and Accessible Functions The ProSafe RS functions that can be used by individual users are determined in user group units IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 61 Access control is applied to the functions that are registered to the Start menu during installa tion of the ProSafe RS software SEE ALso For more information about the functions that are accessible to each user group refer to m Access Permissions to Programs in 3 1 1 Access Permissions to Files and Folders in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 5 Configuring IT Security Settings gt B3 62 B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tool A This section describes the procedure for configuring the IT security settings following the completion of ProSafe RS software installation IMPORTANT When using the IT Security Tool of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later on a computer for the first time any security model user management type can be selected If the settings have already been configured using the IT Security Tool of the following ver sions of YOKOGAWA products on the computer the security model and user management type that have been set will be selected automatically and you cannot change them to a dif ferent security model or user management type here e CENTUM VP R5 01 or later e PRM R3 10 or later e ProSafe RS R3 01 or lat
273. s by using the operation history management set ting tool included in the Access Control and Operation History Management Package ALso For more information about security models refer to 2 Security Models in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 5 Setup when Using the Access Control and Operation History Management Package gt B4 7 E Creating User Accounts in Windows Authentication Mode In Windows authentication mode Windows user names are used to log on to the SENG func tions and authenticate users A IMPORTANT When you use Windows authentication mode create Windows users following the naming convention below rather than the Windows naming convention This naming convention is the same as the naming convention for engineers The naming convention for users in Windows authentication mode is as follows Table B4 5 2 User Naming Convention in Windows Authentication Mode Number of characters Up to 16 characters Character type Alphanumeric characters and the following symbols can be used AA A Double byte characters cannot be used Restriction Upper case characters only 1 For the head character alphanumeric characters and the following symbols can be used _ Names ending with a period cannot be used 1 Only upper case characters can be used for engineer names to be registered in the Engineers Account Builder Al
274. s for Vnet IP open communication For more information about IP addresses and subnet mask for control bus refer to Setting IP Address for Vnet on page B3 46 For more information about IP addresses and subnet mask for VnetIPOpen refer to IP Address for VnetIPOpen on page B3 47 For more information about IP addresses and subnet mask for Ethernet refer to Setting IP Address for Ethernet on page B3 48 Administrative User s Account and Password Determine the name and password for the administrative user account of the computer If the system is used in a domain environment determine the name and password for the ad ministrative user of the domain IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B1 Preparing for the Setup gt B1 2 A SEE ALSO SEE ALSO Security Model and User Management Type Determine the security model and user management type which are set by running the IT se curity tool to be set on the computer you are going to set up IMPORTANT Some of the setup procedures vary depending on the security model and user manage ment type which are set using the IT Security Tool Be sure to determine the policies for se curity settings of the entire system before you start the setup tasks For more information about IT security refer to 1 Overview in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E License Assignment Determine the license as
275. s licenses to each computer on which the software packages are installed On a computer to which licenses have been distributed the software packages can be made available for use by accepting the distributed licenses TIP It is possible to install only License Manager on a computer and use it as the computer dedicated to license management ProSafe RS Software Medium O License Medium Install Distribute licenses License Management Station SENG E e Figure A2 1 1 License Distribution EE ALso For more information about the details of licenses refer to 1 Overview of license management in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 3 A2 2 Procedures for New Setup This section describes the overall procedures for setting up a ProSafe RS system and for set ting up each type of station or computer using flowcharts The procedures for the following types of stations and computers are described e Safety engineering PC SENG e File server Computer dedicated to license management IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A2 2 Procedures for New Setup gt A2 4 A2 2 1 Setup Procedure for a ProSafe RS System The following figure shows the overall procedure for setting up a ProSafe RS system Start Pre
276. s must be of R1 02 or later Control Bus Drivers The control bus drivers installed on the computer should be upgraded to the version supplied in R3 01 The control bus driver of ProSafe RS R3 01 is compatible with the control bus driver supplied with CENTUM VP R5 01 E Basic Procedure of Revision Upgrading In order to use the features added or modified install the ProSafe RS software R3 01 or later and open the existing SCS project ries For more information about cautionary notes for opening existing SCS projects refer to Procedure A Opening SCS Projects on page C4 6 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 30 Appendix 4 8 1 Cautionary Notes for Upgrading E Procedure for Using New and Modified Features After the SENG software has been upgraded to R3 01 some of the features added or modi fied in the R3 01 require performing further tasks such as offline downloading to SCS before they can be used In the following the steps are explained for each feature SEE ALso For more information about Procedure B and Procedure C that appear in this section refer to Procedure B Master Database Offline Download on page C4 6 Procedure C Creating New SCS Project and Offline Download on page C4 7 New I O Modules SAT145 and SAR145 To use the Input Modules that are supported by the R3 01 you must follow the Procedure
277. s within the Vnet IP domain are synchronized using the Vnet IP time synchronization function Time synchronization of the entire system is achieved by synchronizing the time on the domain controller to the SNTP server TIP When a station is used as the SNTP server the system time is not synchronized to UTC but to the time on the hardware of the SNTP server e On the computers connected on Vnet IP do not use the Windows W32Time service to perform time synchronization If used times on the computers are synchronized to the time on the domain controller and synchronization with the SNTP server is prevented e On the domain controller use the Windows W32Time service to synchronize its time with the SNTP server Domain Controller Synchronize Ethernet Vnet IP Sea Time Master Computer Computer erver SENG etc ai i ee e s Vnet IP Pi Vnet IP time synchronization Je TS T T T SCS SCS Figure B2 7 1 3 Implementing Time Synchronization Vnet IP Not Synchronize to UTC IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B2 7 Setting Up Time Synchronization in Windows Domain Environment gt B2 22 E Setting a Station as the SNTP Server 1 Use an administrative user account to log on to the station you want to set as the SNTP server and run the following command as the administrator ProSafe RS software medium drive ProSafe RS TOOLS BeNt
278. same release number IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B1 Preparing for the Setup gt B1 3 SEE ALSO SEE ALSO e The SCS system program release number of SCSs in a system should basically be the same but mixture of different release numbers is allowed However release numbers of SCSs communicating with each other by Inter SCS safety communication must be in ac cordance with the explanation in this manual For more information about compatibility in inter SCS safety communication between different revisions refer to e Appendix 4 9 Upgrading to Version R3 02 00 on page App 4 36 e Appendix 4 Compatibility between Revisions and Cautionary Notes for Upgrading on page App 4 1 When a User Account Control Dialog Box Appears During installation a user account control dialog box may be displayed on certain circumstan ces If displayed click Yes or Continue for uninstallation Yes or Allow to continue Display Style of Control Panel Some setup procedures may include instructions to display Windows Control Panel In this manual instructions to select a menu item on Control Panel of Windows 7 are written assuming that the display style of Control Panel is set to Categories When Connecting with Other Products When connecting ProSafe RS to other YOKOGAWA products configuration of IT security set tings or other tasks may be required For more information about the tas
279. setting to use Exaquantum as an OPC client are mandatory in all cases IMPORTANT As a basic rule the security model and user management type must be consistent in the products to be connected However ProSafe RS and Exaquantum can be connected even if different security model or user management type is applied Table D1 3 1 1 Connection information ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package and Exaquantum R2 60 or later Integration code 0202 0801 02 01 Product 1 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later Product 2 Security model PIMS server of Exaquantum R2 60 or later Legacy model Standard model User manage ment type Standalone management Domain Combination manage ment Required proce dures Integration code Refer to e Setting the logon type and e When the Legacy model is applied to both prod ucts Refer to e Setting the logon type and e When the Standard model is applied to both products Table D1 3 1 2 Connection information Different security model Case 1 0202 0801 02 01 Product 1 Product 2 SOE OPC Interface Package of ProSafe RS R3 01 or later PIMS server of Exaquantum R2 60 or later Security model Standard model ProSafe RS Legacy model Exaquantum User manage ment type of Pro Safe RS Standalone management Domain Combination management Required proce dures Integration code Refer to e Sett
280. shots with different set tings or fonts The difference does not hamper the understanding of basic functionalities and operation and monitoring tasks E Integration with CENTUM The Product can be integrated with CENTUM VP or CENTUM CS 3000 In the User s Man uals the integration with CENTUM VP or CENTUM CS 3000 is referred to as Integration with CENTUM In the User s Manuals the explanations for integrating the Product with CENTUM VP or CENTUM CS 3000 the glossary for various features of CENTUM VP is used instead of the glossary for CENTUM CS 3000 For example the term CENTUM VP System Alarm View is used instead of CENTUM CS 3000 System Alarm window Nevertheless if the features for integrating the Product with CENTUM VP and CENTUM CS 3000 are different both features will be explained separately SEE ALso For more information about the functions and usage of CENTUM VP components for integrating the Product with CENTUM VP refer to User s Manuals IM Technical Information Tl and General Specifications GS of CENTUM VP For more information about the features and usage of CENTUM CS 3000 components for integrating the Product with CENTUM CS 3000 refer to User s Manuals IM Technical Information Tl and General Specifications GS of CENTUM CS 3000 E Explanation of Hardware and Software Behaviors in the User s Manuals In the User s Manuals system behaviors are explained assuming that the latest versions of
281. signments for the computers you are going to set up IMPORTANT In a ProSafe RS system you need to decide on one computer for use as the license manage ment station The license management station can be set up on a computer where SENG runs Among stations of the system you must set up the license management station first Then set up the computers that will be used as license assigned stations The software packages installed on the license assigned stations become available for use after the licenses are dis tributed from the license management station and accepted on the license assigned stations If an independent license management station is desired you can also set it up as the com puter dedicated to license management For more information about licenses refer to 1 Overview of license management in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E E Precautions for Setup Take note of the following precautions before you start the setup Changes in Windows Settings Installing the ProSafe RS Software changes the following Windows settings Table B1 1 Changes in Windows Settings Items Setting Purpose Account name display in logon screen Disable To protect logon account names from unauthorized use Fast user switching Disable Simultaneous logon of multiple users is not supported When the System Contains Different Revisions e SENGs in the same RS project should have the software of the
282. stalled for the first time However you are not required to enter the following items because the data already set are applied e Name e Company name e Installation folder 2 Configure IT security settings SEE ALso For more information about configuring the IT security settings refer to B3 5 2 Running the IT Security Tool on page B3 62 For more information about installing the license management software refer to B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management on page B6 1 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C5 Upgrading to R3 02 20 gt C5 1 C5 Upgrading to R3 02 20 This section describes the cautions that you must exercise when upgrading from R3 02 10 to R3 02 20 Before you upgrade also read the cautionary notes for upgrading to the previous versions that were issued after the software version currently installed on your computer and perform the required tasks for each upgrade A IMPORTANT We recommend that you use the R5 04 00 or a later version of CENTUM VP when integrating ProSafe RS with CENTUM VP E Software Revisions The respective software release number of R3 02 20 is as follows Software Release R3 02 20 1 e SENG software release number R3 02 20 1 e SCS system program release number R3 02 20 1 1 The last two digits of the release number will be changed in accordance with the software revisions after the release of R3 02 20 Inter
283. t The Edit Plan Settings window appears TIP If High performance does not appear under Preferred plan click Show additional plans Select High per formance and then click Change plan settings to the right of it 4 Click Change advanced power settings The Power Options dialog box appears showing the advanced settings TIP Depending on the computer configuration the items of unavailable functions will not be displayed in the step results hereafter 5 Under Hard disk set the setting for Turn off hard disk after to Never gt Power Optio Advanced settings 3 Select the power plan that you want to customize and Y then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable Power saver gt Power saver E Require a password on wakeup Setting Yes Hard disk E Turn off hard disk after Setting Minutes Never S amp Desktop background settings E Wireless Adapter Settings Sleep f_USR settinas Figure B3 2 1 2 Power Options Advanced Settings 6 Configure the Sleep settings as follows IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 10 e Sleep after Never e Allow hybrid sleep Off e Hibernate after Never e Allow wake timers Disable q Select the power plan that you want to customize and yp then choose se
284. t to Standard Model Standalone Management on a File Server For this change the timing of removal from the domain is different from the basic procedure 1 gt A O o N O o Log on as an administrative user who belongs to the Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE_CTL groups of the local computer Start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium Click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool Click Restore to restore the initial security settings that were saved right after the com puter joined a domain before the IT Security Tool was first used to setup security Restart the computer Log on as the same administrative user you previously logged on in step 1 Start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium Click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool Click Setup select Standard model and Standalone management for the file server and run the setup 10 After applying the security settings restart the computer 11 Remove the computer from the domain IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings gt C8 8 C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings You can save the security settings on the local computer using the Save function The saved IT security settings can be restored by using the Restore function of the IT Securi ty Tool as necessar
285. t 4g IDE ATA ATAPI controllers gt lt 2 Keyboards gt F Mice and other pointing devices gt Monitors Network adapters AF Broadcom NetXtreme 57x Gigabit Controller Sam kogawa Vnet Adapter gt 4B Portable Devices gt J Ports COM amp LPT gt p Processors b a Sound video and game controllers gt il System devices b Universal Serial Bus controllers Figure C9 2 2 1 Adapter Driver Added Properly You can check whether the protocol driver is installed properly in this way from the View menu of Device Manager enable Show hidden devices to display Yokogawa Vnet Protocol driver under Non Plug and Play Drivers If the driver is not working properly the symbol appears next to the Non Plug and Play Drivers icon If the Yokogawa Vnet Protocol driver is not displayed immediately after it is installed perform the following For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 Restart the computer For Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 From the Action menu select Scan for hardware changes IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt file Action View Hep 9 m O B mm amp 4 Non Plug and Play Drivers i Ancillary Function Driver for Winsock Disk Virtual Machine Bus Acceleration Filter Driver 2 Dynamic Volume Manager Hardware Policy Driver je HTTP i Kernel Mode Driver Frameworks service p KSecDD
286. t Solid Colors for Picture Location select the color of your choice and then click Save Changes 4 Select Screen Saver The Screen Saver Settings dialog box appears Screen saver None z Settings Preview Wait 1 minutes T On resume display logon screen Power management Conserve energy or maximize performance by adjusting display brightness and other power settings Change power settings Geos cn __avniv _ Figure B3 8 1 3 Screen Saver Settings Dialog Box 5 Select None for Screen saver and then click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 75 6 Select Display gt Adjust resolution gt Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings dialog box appears F Hide modes that this monitor cannot display Clearing this check box allows you to select display modes that this monitor cannot display correctly Haay kaluman display and or damaged hardware Figure B3 8 1 4 Advanced Settings Dialog Box 7 Select the Monitor tab set True Colors 32 bit for Colors and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 76 B3 8 2 Configuring on Windows Vista Follow these procedures when you use a Windows Vista computer E Display Properties The proce
287. t B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 44 TIP Items in the table except Yokogawa Vnet Protocol are installed during the Windows OS installation V net Properties 1 Inthe Network Connections window right click Vnet and select Properties The Vnet Properties dialog box appears This connection uses the following items o Client for Microsoft Networks JE QoS Packet Scheduler C E Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks a Yokogawa Vnet Protocol C 4 Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 V Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 L Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Install Uninstall Properties Descrioti Vnet Protocol Driver Figure B3 3 3 11 Vnet Properties Dialog Box 2 Based on Table List of Items Used for Network Connections select only the check box es for Yokogawa Vnet Protocol and Internet protocol version 4 TCP IPv4 3 After the setting is complete click OK VnetlPOpen Properties 1 Inthe Network Connections window right click VnetIPOpen and select Properties The VnetIPOpen Properties dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 45 Yokogawa Vnet Adapter This connection uses the following items o Client
288. ter on which the software is to be installed is the same as before The software cannot be reinstalled by overwriting the software already installed You must first uninstall the ProSafe RS software and install the ProSafe RS software again Reinstallation for a License Assigned Station SEE ALSO SEE ALSO This section describes the reinstallation procedure for a license assigned station The flow of reinstallation is as follows Start Reinstallation Uninstall Install Configure IT Security Settings Redistribute Licenses from License Management Station as a Configure Function Specific Settings Finish Reinstallation Figure C7 1 1 Flow of Reinstallation for a License Assigned Station Uninstall the ProSafe RS Software Uninstall the ProSafe RS software For more information about the uninstallation procedure refer to C6 1 1 Uninstalling the ProSafe RS Software on page C6 3 Install the ProSafe RS Software Install the ProSafe RS software For more information about installing the ProSafe RS software refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 Configure IT Security Settings Configure IT security settings in the same way as that for a new installation of the ProSafe RS software IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C7 1 When the Computer Used is the Same gt C7 3 E bet ALso For
289. the Hardware of SCS and Devices for Connection between Domains gt B7 Configuring the Hardware of SCS and Devices for Connection between Domains B7 1 Configure the hardware of SCS and devices used for connection between domains such as V net routers and L3 switches e On the processor module of SCS set the V net or Vnet IP address e Ifa V net router AVR10D is used to connect a Vnet IP domain and a V net domain the V net router address should be set on the CENTUM side A WARNING When removing and installing the cards to set DIP switches take measure to prevent the damages caused by static electricity SEE AaLso For more information about Antistatic measures refer to Appendix 3 Antistatic Precautions When Handling Hardware on page App 3 1 For more information about setting up the hardware when using V net routers bus converters and communi cation gateway refer to e CENTUM VP Communication Devices IM 33K50D10 50E CENTUM VP Communication Devices IM 33M50D10 40E CS 1000 CS 3000 Communication Devices IM 33Y06H01 01E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 B8 TIP lt B8 Installing the Functions that Operate with CENTUM VP Licenses gt B8 1 Installing the Functions that Operate with CENTUM VP Licenses The test function and SOE Viewer of ProSafe RS operate in coordination with CENTUM VP packages You can set up a computer so as to use only these functions without using oth
290. the items that must be determined before you start setting up a station and precautions for the setup E Items to be Determined Before the Setup This section lists the items that need to be determined before you start the setup tasks Domain Number Station Number SEE ALSO A domain number is a number assigned to a group of stations connected on a control bus network Domain numbers should be set within a range from 1 to 31 when integrating with CENTUM 1 to 16 A station number is a number assigned to each station In each domain station numbers should be set within a range from 1 to 64 Computer Name Station Name A computer name is a name used to identify each computer on the Windows network You can set the computer name from Windows Control Panel A station name is a unique name that is assigned based on the control bus address in the ProSafe RS system Examples SENGddss SENG STNddss computers other than SENG ddss dd is the domain number and ss is the station number It is recommended to match the computer name and the station name of a station IP Address Determine the IP addresses of stations for control bus and Ethernet When using Vnet IP without installing Ethernet also determine the IP addresses for Vnet IP open communication Subnet Mask Determine the subnet masks of stations for control bus and Ethernet When using Vnet IP without installing Ethernet also determine the subnet mask
291. the user account for using ProSafe RS SOE Viewer to the CTM_OPERATOR and PSF_OPERATOR groups For Standalone management perform this setting on the computer where ProSafe RS SOE Viewer is used For Domain or Combination management perform this setting on the domain controller SEE ALso For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Domain or Combination management refer to B2 4 Creating Domain Users on page B2 9 For more information about how to create user accounts and add them to groups in Standalone management refer to B3 7 1 When the Standard Model with Standalone Management Security Settings are Applied on page B3 69 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 D1 1 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 5 2 CENTUM VP Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and ProSafe RS SOE OPC Interface Package This section explains the required settings when Exaopc OPC Interface Package for HIS LHS2411 of CENTUM VP and SOE OPC Interface Package CHS2200 of ProSafe RS are installed on the same computer If the computer installed with both LHS2411 and CHS2200 comes under either of the follow ing cases perform all the procedures explained for each case e The computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 is designated as the OPC server for OPC communication e The computer installed with LHS2411 and CHS2200 uses OPC client services e Ina Domain management or
292. though both upper case and lower case characters can be used on the Windows side they are not distinguished use upper case characters only You can set passwords within 63 characters using alphanumeric characters and symbols e Passwords are case sensitive e The following symbols and space character are allowed I 8 amp lt gt Al SEE ALso For more information about how to create Windows user accounts refer to B3 7 Creating User Accounts on page B3 68 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B4 5 Setup when Using the Access Control and Operation History Management Package gt B4 8 B4 5 1 Setup Procedure when Using Access Control and SEE ALSO Operation History Management Functions This section explains the setup procedure you should perform after installing the Pro Safe RS software when using the access control and operation history management functions If you want to introduce the access control and operation history management functions later use the procedure at a proper timing Perform the following tasks after creating administrator and engineer user accounts on Win dows 1 Add the Windows accounts for administrators and engineers to their respective appropri ate user groups 2 Configure security settings for the operation history database On a computer granted with the licenses of CHS5100 Safety System Generation and Maintenance Function Package and
293. ting This section describes how to handle problems related to Windows E Note on User Account Control If you log on as a non administrative user and try to start the installer the following dialog box appears Click No and log on again as an administrative user and then start the installer again want to allow the following program to make changes to this computer Program name Yokogawa Vnet Driver setup command Verified publisher Yokogawa Electric Corporation File origin Hard drive on this computer To continue type an administrator password and then click Yes MAINTENANCE Password Show details Figure C9 1 1 User Account Control Dialog Box When Logged on as a Non administrative User E The System Locks Up Contact YOKOGAWA service E Computer Operation Becomes Unstable If the operation of the computer that was working normally has become unstable do the task described below Cause Incompatible software was installed Remedy Uninstall the incompatible software you have installed SEE For more information about software that can coexist with ProSafe RS refer to Software that can Coexist with ProSafe RS on page A3 4 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 3 C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network This section describes how to handle problems related to the network IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan
294. tion describes how to install the control bus driver and the Vnet IP open communica tion driver If you use the built in Ethernet interface of the computer or an over the counter Ethernet card read the attached instruction manual and install the proper Ethernet driver accordingly IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 33 B3 3 1 Installing the Control Bus Driver This section describes the procedure for installing the control bus driver on Windows 7 as an instance E Precautions at Installation TIP Mount a control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface card in computers to be connected on a control bus network In addition you must install the control bus driver Observe the follow ing precautions when you install the control bus driver Before installing the control bus driver be sure to install a control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface card in the computer If you installed the control bus driver without installing a control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface card by mistake uninstall the control bus driver Then install a control bus interface card and install the driver again If you want to change the slot in which a control bus interface card or Vnet IP interface card is installed uninstall the control bus driver first and then change the slot After changing the slot install the driver again When you remove a control bus interface card or Vnet I
295. to another name Since the access permissions are granted to folders with the share name RS Projects or RS Share during configuration of IT security settings unintended settings will be applied if these share names are not assigned to appropriate folders If IT security settings have been applied to an unintended folder delete the permissions set during the configuration of IT security settings and set the original access permissions based on the setting of another folder such as the C Windows folder E Procedure 3 Save the IT Security Settings on the File Server A IMPORTANT The existing security settings before using the IT Security Tool will be required as the initial data when you change the security settings in the future So you must save the existing se curity settings here If the file server computer is to be added to a domain save two sets of initial security settings before and after you add it to the domain If the file server computer is not to be added to a domain you need to save only one set of initial security settings Follow these steps to save the security settings 1 Log on as a user who has the rights to set up a file server 2 Insert the ProSafe RS software medium into the drive e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the software medium The installation me
296. toPlay dialog box appears click Run Launcher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the ProSafe RS software medium The installation menu appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software gt B3 55 ProSafe RS SETUP ProSafe RS Software Setting IT Security File server domain controller use License Manager Software Install drivers Control Bus Driver Vnet IP Open com driver Figure B3 4 1 Installation Menu 4 Click ProSafe RS Software in the installation menu 5 Ifa dialog box appears confirming to install Windows redistributable modules click In stall The following Bosse will be cel eee ae Visual C Runtime Libraries x86 NET Framework 35 SP1 MSXML4 0 SP3 Do you wish to install these components if you choose Cancel setup will ext Figure B3 4 2 Dialog Box for Confirming Module Installation TIP This dialog box appears when the Windows redistributable modules required to run ProSafe RS are not al ready installed The following modules are necessary for ProSafe RS e Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 e MSXML 4 0 SP3 e Microsoft Data Access Object 3 5 e Microsoft Visual C 2008 redistributable package x86 If you click Cancel the installation of the ProSafe RS software is discontinued Restarting the computer may be re
297. ttings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable amp Allow hybrid sleep Setting Off E Hibernate after Setting Never E Allow wake timers Setting Disable m USI i Figure B3 2 1 3 Power Options Advanced Settings 7 Set the setting for Power button action under Power buttons and lid to Shut down 6 Select the power plan that you want to customize and P then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable Wireless Adapter Settings USB settings B Power buttons and lid E Power button action Setting Shut down PCI Express Processor power management Display m Multi Figure B3 2 1 4 Power Options Advanced Settings 8 Under Display set the setting for Turn off display after to Never IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 11 gt Power Optio Advanced settings Select the power plan that you want to customize and then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power is Change settings that are currently unavailable High performance Active gt Wireless Adapter Settings Sleep USB settings Power buttons and lid PCI Express Processor power management Display S Turn off display after Setting Minutes Never Multimedia settinas BR BABS
298. tware YOKOGAWA makes no warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the Soft ware Product s merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose except as speci fied in the warranty terms Purchase the appropriate number of licenses of the Software Product according to the number of computers to be used No copy of the Software Product may be made for any purpose other than backup other wise it is deemed as an infringement of YOKOGAWA s Intellectual Property rights Keep the software medium of the Software Product in a safe place No reverse engineering reverse compiling reverse assembling or converting the Soft ware Product to human readable format may be performed for the Software Product No part of the Software Product may be transferred converted or sublet for use by any third party without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 Documentation Conventions E Symbols The following symbols are used in the User s Manuals Identifies instructions that must be observed to avoid physical A injury electric shock or death CAUTION Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent damage A WARNING to the software or hardware or system failures of the Product Identifies important information required to understand opera AY IMPORTANT ions or functions TI P Identifies additional information SE E Identifies referenced content ALSO In online
299. ty Setting Utility for CENTUM VP and the IT Security Tool for ProSafe RS If ProSafe RS is installed on the same computer where CENTUM VP is installed use the Security Setting Utility first and then use the IT Security Tool of ProSafe RS to configure security settings Next change the authenti cation level of COM from Connect to None Then make the following settings on ProSafe RS and CENTUM SEE ALso For more information about how to change the authentication level of COM refer to e DCOM setting procedure in m Settings for the legacy model in A3 2 Settings of the OPC client in Open Interfaces IM 32Q05B10 31E E Settings on ProSafe RS Make the same settings as when integrating ProSafe RS with CENTUM VP 5 01 E Settings on CENTUM Make the same settings as when integrating ProSafe RS with CENTUM VP 5 01 E Settings on a File Server If you place project data and operation history management databases of ProSafe RS on a file server computer storing CENTUM VP project data set the share name for the ProSafe RS database folder on the file server computer and then run the IT Security Tool of ProSafe RS E Coexisting with Exaopc OPC Interface Package for HIS When CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS are operating in a domain environment set as follows e Add the CTM_PROCESS user to the PSF_OPC_LCL group e If the security model is the Standard model add the PSF_PROCESS user to the CTM_OPC_LCL group If the securi
300. ty model is the Legacy model add the EXAUSER user to the CTM_OPC_LCL group When CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS are operating in a workgroup environment set as fol lows e Add the CTM_PROCESS user to the PSF_OPC group e If the security model is the Standard model add the PSF_PROCESS user to the CTM_OPC group If the security model is the Legacy model add the EXAUSER user to the CTM_OPC group ree For more information about the share name of the ProSafe RS database folder refer to mg Procedure 2 Create and Set Up the Shared Folders on page B5 3 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 1 CENTUM VP and ProSafe RS gt D1 12 D1 1 6 Required Settings when Integrating with CS 3000 R3 06 to R3 09 If you integrate ProSafe RS with CS 3000 computer security cannot be reinforced You can not install both CENTUM and ProSafe RS on the same computer either Make the following settings Select the Legacy model when you run the IT Security Tool Create a CENTUM user account account name CENTUM on ProSafe RS and set the same password as the CENTUM account on the CENTUM side IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt D1 2 ProSafe RS and PRM gt D1 13 D1 2 ProSafe RS and PRM This section describes the settings when connecting ProSafe RS and PRM TIP PRM client and ProSafe RS software can be installed on the same computer however special setting is not required because they do not work in
301. ucer side PROD_ transmits data to the time an FB for communication on the consumer side CONS _ receives the data This time interval is called inter FB transmission delay time If the status where this interval exceeds the inter FB transmission delay timeout value DLYT of CONS_ continues for the time indicated by OUTT a communication error oc curs and a failsafe value VAL is output The guidelines of timeout value settings are given in the following IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 33 Setting of Reception Interval Timeout Value OUTT OUTT select the longer scan period of either the producer or the consumer x 8 Additional Delay Additional Delay V net Delay No BCV CGW used 0 s Via BCV CGW the number of BCV used x 1 s the number of pairs of CGWs used x 2 s Vnet IP Delay Within a Vnet IP domain 0s Between Vnet IP domains No wide area network 0 s Regardless of the number of L8SWes Between Vnet IP domains Wide area network 1 s Regardless of the number of L8SWes Vnet IP V net V net delay Vnet IP delay V net router delay 1 s V net 1 Vnet IP V net 2 V net 1 delay Vnet IP delay V net 2 delay Two V net routers delay 2 s Set 3 seconds to OUTT when the calculated OUTT is shorter than 3 seconds Setting of the Transmission Delay Timeout Value DLYT 1 In cases of Inter SCS safety communications betw
302. umbnail previews Show shadows under mouse pointer Show shadows under windows Show thumbnails instead of icons Show translucent selection rectangle Show window contents while dragging Slide open combo boxes DE Smooth edges of screen fonts Smooth scroll list boxes X Canann apply Figure B3 2 1 1 Performance Options Dialog Box Visual Effects Tab SSS SS8S5S8S8S8 T Y m E S S S SS S SS 5 Click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 9 E Virtual Memory ProSafe RS does not require virtual memory configuration However if the ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP software coexist on the same computer virtual memory should be configured according to the instruction of CENTUM VP E Power Options This section describes how to configure the Power Options settings Some of the items in the explanation may not be displayed on your computer depending on the computer s hardware configuration If not displayed the function of that item is not available on your computer 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Power Options The Power Options window appears 3 Select High performance under Preferred plans click Change plan settings to the right of i
303. uncher exe e Ifthe AutoPlay dialog box does not appear use Explorer and double click Launch er exe in the top folder of the ProSafe RS software medium The installation menu appears On the installation menu click the Vnet IP Open com driver A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the setup Select INSTALL and click OK A dialog box appears confirming to execute the installation Click OK A Windows Security dialog box appears Make sure that the Always trust software from Yokogawa Electric Corporation check box is clear and click Install IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 36 TIP e Do not click Don t Install on the Windows Security dialog box If clicked an error occurs Do not select the Always trust software from Yokogawa Electric Corporation check box If selected a confirmation dialog box will not appear during the subsequent installations 7 When the message telling successful installation is displayed click OK TIP If you have added or deleted any other devices before you install the Vnet IP open communication driver a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed In such a case be sure to restart the com puter IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 3 Configuring Network Settings gt B3 37 B3 3 3 Configuring Windows Network Settings You must configure the
304. ure C8 4 1 2 Change Password Encryption Key 5 Enter the old and the new encryption keys and click Next When the changing process is completed the Changed Password Encryption Key page appears 6 Click Finish 7 Click Close on the IT Security Tool menu IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File Password gt C8 20 C8 4 2 Procedure for a File Server or Domain Controller This section describes the procedure for changing the password encryption key for security setting files on a computer that serves only as a file server or a domain controller computer E Changing Procedure 1 Log on as a member of the PSF_MAINTENANCE group or as an administrative user when the Legacy model is applied 2 Start the installation menu from the ProSafe RS software medium and click Setting IT Security File server domain controller use to start the IT Security Tool The rest of steps are the same as the procedure for an SENG PC EE Hee For more information about how to start the installation menu refer to B3 4 Installing the ProSafe RS Software on page B3 54 IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 Troubleshooting gt C9 1 C9 Troubleshooting This section describes the causes of and remedies for problems that may occur IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C9 1 Windows Related Troubleshooting gt C9 2 C9 1 Windows Related Troubleshoo
305. ure to make it your desktop background or select more than one picture to create a slide show Picture location Solid Colors E mee e Figure B3 8 3 2 Desktop Background Window 3 Set Solid Colors for Picture Location select the color of your choice and then click Save Changes 4 Select Screen Saver The Screen Saver Settings dialog box appears Screen Saver Settings Preview Figure B3 8 3 3 Screen Saver Settings Dialog Box 5 Select None for Screen saver and then click OK 6 Select Display gt Adjust resolution gt Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings dialog box appears IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 80 Generic PnP Monitor and NVIDIA Quadro FX 580 Properties Figure B3 8 3 4 Advanced Settings Dialog Box 7 Select the Monitor tab set True Colors 32 bit for Colors and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 81 B3 8 4 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 Follow these procedures when you use a Windows 2008 computer E Display Properties The procedure for setting the display properties is explained as follows 1 Log on using the user account for which to set display properties 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization
306. urity vulnerability E Security Model and User Management within a Control Bus Domain Within a V net domain or a Vnet IP domain the security model and user management type must be consistent As the exception however Domain management and Combination man agement can be mixed This mixed use of user management is also allowed for file server computers E Standalone Management and Windows Domain Even on Windows domain member computers you can apply the Standard model with Standalone management type of security settings Security Setting Items By running the IT Security Tool various security setting items are configured The tool config ures a different set of security setting items according to the selected combination of security model and user management type EE ALso For more information about the setting items set by the IT Security Tool refer to m Security Setting Items in 6 1 IT Security Tool in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E E Groups and Users Automatically Created during Security Configuration By applying the Standard model of security settings a specific set of users and groups are automatically created SEE ALso For more information about the users and groups that are automatically created by the tool refer to 2 2 3 Users Groups Respect to the Combination of User Management and Security Model in ProSafe RS Security Guide IM 32Q01C70 31E E User Group
307. usting display brightness and other power settings Change power settings oc _ cancel C a Figure B3 8 2 2 Screen Saver Settings 5 Select None for Screen saver and then click OK 6 Select Display Settings The Display Settings dialog box appears ine O E Monitor Drag the icons to match your monitors Identify Monitors 1 Generic PnP Monitor on ATI FireGL V3300 Microsoft Corporation WDD v E This is my main monitor F Extend the desktop onto this monitor Resolution 1280 by 1024 pixels How do I get the best display Figure B3 8 2 3 Display Settings 7 Select Highest 32 bit for Colors and then click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 8 Configuring Windows Environment Settings for Each User gt B3 78 B3 8 3 Configuring on Windows Server 2008 R2 Follow these procedures when you use a Windows 2008 R2 computer E Showing Icons on the Task Tray On license assigned stations running Windows Server 2008 R2 you must set so that the Li cense Agent icon is always shown on the task tray 1 Log on using the user account for which the License Agent icon should be displayed 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Notification Area Icons TIP If you cannot find Notification Area Icons select Large icons or Small icons from the View by drop down list in the upper right of the Co
308. ut antistatic measures refer to Appendix 3 Antistatic Precautions When Handling Hardware on page App 3 1 E Setting Up the Control Bus Interface Card The following two types of control bus interface cards are available These cards have the same functionality e VF702 for PCI Express e F701 for PCI bus The Control Bus interface card has DIP switches for setting the domain number and the sta tion number The combination of domain number and station number determines the station address You must set the DIP switches before you configure network settings This section describes how to set the DIP switches The DIP switch locations are the same on VF702 and VF701 cards o DIP switches DOMAIN i Domain number fio z ro STATION or w _ Station number PL Figure B3 1 1 Location of DIP Switches Setting the Domain Number A domain is a collection of stations that are connected on one control bus network Set a do main number from 1 to 31 1 to 16 when integrating with CENTUM IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware gt B3 3 SEE ALSO SEE ALSO SEE ALSO DOMAIN NO MSB LSB POO 12345678 0 Le Domain number 5 bits Fixed to 0 2 bits Parity of the domain number 1 bit odd par
309. uter and SCS via V net or Vnet IP SEE Atso For more information about how to grant license of CENTUM SOE Viewer Package LPC6920 refer to License Management IM 33K01C20 50E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C Maintenance gt C 1 C Maintenance This section describes the tasks required in the operation and maintenance of stations after they have been newly set up IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C1 Adding Licenses and Changing License Assignments gt C1 1 C1 Adding Licenses and Changing License Assignments This section describes how to add licenses which is required to add new software packages on a station and how to change the assignments of licenses which is required to migrate software packages between stations IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C1 1 Adding a License gt C1 2 C1 1 Adding a License The procedure for loading an additionally purchased license on the license management sta tion is the same as the procedure for new installation SEE ALso For more information about how to load an additionally purchased license on the license management sta tion refer to 3 1 Reading additional licenses on a license management station in License Management IM 32Q01C60 31E IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C1 2 Changing License Assignments gt C1 3 C1 2 Changing License Assignments Use the License Manager on the lic
310. value smaller than Specify as or engineering units no restrictions on 25 0 it is processed as 25 0 If you specify a range in VAL value greater than 125 it is processed as 125 ANLGVOTER Due to the specification changes of ANLGVOTER parameters the operations of VAL on SCS are changed as shown in the following table Table Appendix 4 8 2 3 Specification of VAL Earlier than R3 01 R3 01 or later 25 to 125 If you specify a value smaller than Specify as or engineering units no restrictions on 25 0 it is processed as 25 0 If you specify a range in VAL value greater than 125 it is processed as 125 E Specification Changes Made in SCS System Program Release Number R2 03 51 Overview of Specification Changes After the SCS system program release number R2 03 51 information on system time is no longer used to diagnose delay in inter SCS safety communication and SCS link transmission safety communication Specifically there is no need to consider the gap in the system times of related SCSs when determining the DLYT value IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt Appendix 4 8 Upgrading to Version R3 01 gt App 4 32 A IMPORTANT In order to operate inter SCS safety communication and SCS link transmission safety commu nication with the specification of R2 03 51 or later upgrade the revision of all SCS system programs that communicate each other to R2 03 51 or later If either the re
311. ver in the system and you can access the files placed on this server comput er from other computers On a file server you may place a project database the check in destination folder for Version Control Tool and or the operation history database of the Ac cess Control and Operation History Management Package allowing access to these databa ses via the network This section describes how to set up a file server computer for the following cases e Computer that serves only as a file server Computer that serves as both a file server and an SENG Computer that serves as both a file server and a license management station E Item to be Prepared Have the following item at hand before you set up a file server e ProSafe RS software medium Model CHSKM30 E File System Ensure that the file system is in the NTFS format IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server gt B5 2 B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server This section describes how to set up a computer that is used only as a file server Administrative User who Performs the Setup A file server must be set up by an administrative user who belongs to the groups shown in the following table Table B5 1 1 Groups to Which the Administrative User Who Sets Up a File Server Belongs Security model and user management type to be applied Standard model Standalone management Domain Co
312. vers This section provides troubleshooting related to the installation and deletion of network driv ers A IMPORTANT Some operations require administrative rights and a User Account Control dialog box may appear when you try to do such operations You can continue the operation by clicking Con tinue as long as you have logged on as a user with administrative rights E Confirming Installation Result Check if the network driver is properly installed If the driver does not appear on Device Man ager you need to install the driver again Control Bus Driver When the driver is added Yokogawa Vnet Adapter appears under Network Adapters on De vice Manager If the driver does not start successfully the symbol appears next to the network adapter icon Follow these steps to display Device Manger 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Security gt Device Manager TIP If you are using Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 select Control Panel gt System and Maintenance gt System gt Device Manager IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 TIP lt C9 2 Troubleshooting Related to Network gt C9 6 File Action View Help e DEUTSE RS a g HIS0464 gt qi Computer gt Disk drives b B Display adapters gt ef DVD CD ROM drives gt ei Floppy disk drives gt ei Floppy drive controllers gt QR Human Interface Devices g
313. vision of the trans mission or reception side has not been upgraded the system operates with the method be fore the change which uses the system time for diagnosis of delay If the communication is performed with the method before the change take the gap in the system times among in volved SCSs as the DLYT value as in the past Calculation Method of DLYT in Inter SCS Safety Communication How to calculate DLYT in inter SCS safety communication in case of revisions earlier than R2 03 51 is explained below Reception interval timeout value OUTT and inter FB transmission delay timeout value DLYT are used to set the timeout monitoring time of inter SCS safety communication Temporary transmission delay errors can be detected by monitoring the communication with OUTT In addition you can set DLYT to detect constant transmission delay errors DLYT detects not only transmission delay but also time gap among SCSs For this reason determine the set value of DLYT taking generation of erroneous trips due to time gap into con sideration as well e Reception interval timeout value OUTT An FB for communication on the consumer side CONS _ checks the interval of data re ception If the data reception interval exceeds the reception interval timeout value OUTT a communication error occurs and a failsafe value VAL is output e Transmission delay timeout value DLYT DLYT checks the time from the time an FB for communication on the prod
314. w appears 3 Click Configure schedule The Modify Schedule dialog box appears 4 Clear the Run on a schedule recommended check box and click OK IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 14 Select disks Figure B3 2 1 8 Modify Schedule Dialog Box IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 15 B3 2 2 Configuring on Windows Vista Follow these procedures when you use a Windows Vista computer E File System Ensure that the file system is in the NTFS format If it is already formatted in the FAT format reinstall the operating system and reformat partitions into NTFS Partitions not installed with OS should also be formatted into NTFS E System Performance Follow these steps to configure the system performance setting 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt System and Maintenance gt System gt Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Settings in the Performance section The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Click the Visual Effects tab and select Let Windows choose what s best for my comput er Visual Effects Advanced Data Execution Prevention Select the settings you want to use for the appearance and performance of Windows on th
315. ware require ments for CENTUM 5 Dedicated for YOKOGAWA s control systems Includes misdetection prevention of YOKOGAWA software products and cus tomized support in conjunction with McAfee Inc 6 Version 11 0 does not support Windows Vista Business Edition SP2 CENTUM Integration System When ProSafe RS is integrated with CENTUM available ProSafe RS functions are limited de pending on the software release number of CENTUM This section explains such limitations and precautions to be taken when installing the ProSafe RS and CENTUM software on the same computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt A3 2 Software Requirements gt A3 5 SEE ALso For more information about precautions on each revision of ProSafe RS refer to ProSafe RS Release Information IM 32Q01A50 31E For more information about precautions on each revision of CENTUM refer to e CENTUM VP Release Information IM 33K01A50 50E and CENTUM VP Installation IM 33K01C10 50E e CENTUM VP Electronic Document Addendum IM 33M01A50 40E and CENTUM VP Installation IM 33M01A20 40E e CS 3000 Electronic Document Addendum IM 33Q01A50 01E and CS 3000 Installation IM33Q01C10 01E Combination of Release Numbers that can be Integrated The following table shows the release numbers of ProSafe RS and CENTUM that can be inte grated into a single system Table A3 2 3 Release Numbers of ProSafe RS and CENTUM that can be Integrated
316. wer plan that you want to customize and computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable Hard disk Wireless Adapter Settings B Sleep amp Sleep after Setting Never amp Allow hybrid sleep Setting Off B Hibernate after Setting Never m USR settinas Figure B3 2 2 3 Advanced Settings in Power Options Dialog Box Sleep Setting 7 Configure the Power button and lid settings as follows e Power button action Shut down e Start menu power button Shut down Select the power plan that you want to customize and P then choose settings that reflect how you want your computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable Allow hybrid sleep Hibernate after USB settings E Power buttons and lid Power button action Setting Shut down E Start menu power button Setting Shut down PCI Express Figure B3 2 2 4 Advanced Settings in Power Options Dialog Box Power Button and LID Settings 8 Under Display set the setting for Turn off display after to Never IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 18 rn Pov ver r Options Advanced settings then choose settings that reflect how you want your j Select the power plan that you want to customize and computer to manage power Change settings that are currently unavailable High performance Active ba USB settings Power
317. where SENG runs Among stations of the system you must set up the license management station first Then set up the computers that will be used as license assigned stations The software packages installed on the license assigned stations become available for use after the licenses are dis tributed from the license management station and accepted on the license assigned stations If an independent license management station is desired you can also set it up as the com puter dedicated to license management rea For more information about how to set up the computer dedicated to license management refer to B6 Setting Up the Computer Dedicated to License Management on page B6 1 E Items to be Prepared Have the following items at hand before new installation of the ProSafe RS software e ProSafe RS software medium Model CHSKM30 Also have the following items at hand if the SENG is to be used as a license management station These are required when distributing licenses e ProSafe RS license medium Model CHSCM30 e ProSafe RS license sheet with project ID IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware gt B3 2 B3 1 Setting Up the Hardware This section describes the hardware setups required for an SENG A WARNING When removing and installing the cards to set DIP switches take measure to prevent the damages caused by static electricity EE ALso For more information abo
318. word encryption key Restore Restores the security settings of the OS to the saved security settings Change Pass word Encryption key Changes the password encryption key of the saved security settings This function is used when you want to change the password periodically Ee For more information about the functions of the IT Security Tool other than Setup refer to e C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings on page C8 8 e C8 3 Restoring the IT Security Settings on page C8 13 e C8 4 Changing the Security Setting File Password on page C8 17 E Security Model You can select from the following security models according to the required security strength Legacy Model This model does not strengthen security This model can be used if the priority is to be com patible with ProSafe RS R3 01 or earlier versions and to integrate with other YOKOGAWA products that do not support the IT Security Tool Since this model disables Windows Firewall you need to consider the possible impact of this model s vulnerability to information leaks worms and virus attacks when you select this model Standard Model This model enables access control by user authentication DCOM setting and Windows Fire wall to guard against direct attacks and network attacks TIP If you need a higher level of security than what the Standard model provide the Strengthened model is avail able SEE ALso
319. ws Server 2008 enable NET Framework 3 0 5 Restart the computer IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 6 lt B5 1 Setting Up a Computer that Serves Only as a File Server gt B5 3 Log on as the user set in step 3 above SEE ALso For more information about how to enable NET Framework 3 5 1 and 3 0 refer to mg Enabling NET Framework 3 5 1 on page B3 25 Standard Model with Domain Combination Management 1 3 4 Log on as a user who belongs to both the Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTENANCE groups of the domain Perform one of the following operations e On Windows Server 2008 R2 enable NET Framework 3 5 1 e On Windows Server 2008 enable NET Framework 3 0 Restart the computer Log on using the same user account as in step 1 TIP If any other YOKOGAWA product coexists in the computer the user also needs to be a member of the MAIN TENANCE group of the coexisting product For example if CENTUM VP coexists also add the user to the CTM_MAINTENANCE group SEE ALso For more information about how to enable NET Framework 3 5 1 and 3 0 refer to m Enabling NET Framework 3 5 1 on page B3 25 E Procedure 2 Create and Set Up the Shared Folders In order to reinforce the security of folders that store databases using the IT Security Tool you must name the target folders with the following share names Project database Share name RS Projects Operation history
320. y E User Who Performs Saving When performing saving log on as a user who belongs to the groups shown in the following table Table C8 2 1 Groups to Which the User Who Saves the Security Settings Belongs Currently applied security model and user management type Legacy model Administrators of the lo cal computer Standard model Standalone type Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE of the local computer Domain Combination type Administrators and PSF_MAINTE NANCE_LCL of the local computer Domain Admins and PSF_MAINTE NANCE of the domain E Regarding the Files that Hold the Saved Security Settings Saving the security settings creates two files with extensions of hed and csf When restoring the saved security settings both files are required IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt C8 2 Saving the IT Security Settings gt C8 9 C8 2 1 Procedure for SENG PC This section describes the procedure for saving the security settings on an SENG PC E Saving Procedure 1 From the Start menu click YOKOGAWA Security gt IT Security Tool The IT Security Tool starts 2 Click Save The Specify destination page appears Specify destination Destination B Distinguished Name Support Product Support OS E Windows 7 E Windows Server 2008 R2 E Windows Server 2008 E Windows Vista E Windows Server 2003 R2 E Windows Server 2003 E Windows
321. y as follows 1 Create a new project and enter all the project settings The existing SCS project can be upgraded to a later revision by using Import Export func tions Upgrading the SENG to a newer revision and creating a new SCS project the whole existing project data can be transferred to the new SCS project If the new SCS project uses a library the library must be opened by a new revision SCS Manager However if the library POU uses FB FU supported only by a new revision create a new library When you have upgraded an SENG you must ensure that all SCS projects and library are of the same revi sion as the upgraded SENG Follow these steps to upgrade the revision of SCS and library 1 Open each original library projects to upgrade Then copy the library to the predetermined folder Ll BRARIES of the SCS project that uses the library 2 Open each SCS project to upgrade If a project level password is set for the SCS project or library you have to enter the password and open it in ReadWrite mode in order to upgrade If you do not know the password contact the creator of the SCS project and library 2 Run build and check the project data using Integrity Analyzer Cross Reference Analyzer 3 Offline download the project IMPORTANT The SCS project and library created by an SENG in a revision later than the currently used revision cannot be used e The SCS project created or opened by a new revision of SENG cann
322. y computer C Animate controls and elements inside windows CO Animate windows when minimizing and maximizing Animations in the taskbar and Start Menu 7 Fade or slide menus into view O Fade or slide ToolTips into view O Fade out menu items after dicking C Show window contents while dragging O Slide open combo boxes C Smooth edges of screen fonts C Smooth scroll list boxes O Use drop shadows for icon labels on the desktop O Use visual styles on windows and buttons Figure B3 2 3 1 Performance Options Dialog Box Visual Effects Tab 5 Click OK E Virtual Memory ProSafe RS does not require virtual memory configuration However if the ProSafe RS and CENTUM VP software coexist on the same computer virtual memory should be configured according to the instruction of CENTUM VP IM 32Q01C50 31E 4th Edition Jan 30 2015 00 lt B3 2 Setting Up Windows gt B3 22 Power Options This section describes how to configure the Power Options settings Some of the items in the explanation may not be displayed on your computer depending on the computer s hardware configuration If not displayed the function of that item is not available on your computer 1 Logon as an administrative user 2 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Power Options The Power Options window appears 3 Select High performance under Preferred plans and click Change plan settings to the right of it

in Installation (IM 32Q01C50-31E)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents